Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Calypso PDF
Calypso PDF
Calypso PDF
Basics
Operating Instructions
The design and delivered components of the CMM, its options, the pro-
gram packages, and the relevant documentation are subject to change.
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized and
disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons misusing
this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering
a utility model.
This manual is subject to modification. All rights pertaining to changes in
the CMM and its options reserved.
All product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the corre-
sponding proprietors.
Although utmost care has been taken in preparing the information given
in this manual, we cannot assume any liability for its completeness and
correctness, except in case of willful intent.
CALYPSO
Version 2014
Operating Instructions
2014-04-11
61212-2011102
Table of contents
Preface
Chapter 1 Introduction
Alphabetic index
NOTICE
The additional CALYPSO options are described in separate manuals.
– Metrotomography (option)
With the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and meas-
ure CT data records gained by METROTOM.
– CALYPSO DME Interface (option)
The CALYPSO DME Interface option allows you to use CALYPSO for
the control of a DME server.
– AIMS Interface (option)
The AIMS Interface option allows you to import measurement plans
from AIMS to CALYPSO and to export the results calculated by means
of these measurement plans back to AIMS.
– Calypso Barcode (option)
The CALYPSO Barcode option makes it possible to use barcode infor-
mation on workpieces for partially automated quality testing.
– Calypso Tube Measurement Program (option)
The Tube Measurement Program option enables you to define, meas-
ure and evaluate curved tubes.
– VAST Performance (option)
The VAST Performance option enables you to use the FlyScan function
which makes it possible to measure paths interrupted by grooves
much faster and more conveniently in one go. Furthermore, you have
access to the quick stylus system change.
– PiWeb FlexReporting (option)
The PiWeb FlexReporting option allows you to evaluate the measured
values of a measurement plan in separate reports. The reports may
contain graphic representations, integrated statistical evaluations and
interactive elements and can be updated by pressing a button after
selecting the desired measurements.
– PC-DMIS Import (option)
You can use the “PC-DMIS import” option to import a program cre-
ated with PC-DMIS and to have it converted to a CALYPSO measure-
ment plan. Provided you have a licensed and executable version of
PC-DMIS installed on your computer.
Supplementary litera- Simply Measure – And what you should know to do it right, A metrology
ture primer
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, Order number: 612302-9002
ZEISS training block You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000
Text conventions and Text conventions The following text conventions and symbols are used in
symbols these instructions:
Example Description
Features Text element of the graphics screen
display.
Comment The Comment button on the
screen.
<machine name> Variable text or dummy for a name.
C:\windows\w.ini The w.ini file in the windows direc-
tory on the C:\ drive.
For this section... A passage containing important in-
formation.
Preface This is a cross reference. When
viewing this manual on the screen,
you will be guided to the indicated
text passage by clicking the refer-
ence.
Plan ® CNC-Start The Run command in the Plan
submenu of the main menu.
CTRL+A Press the CTRL key and the letter A at
the same time.
Icons Three special icons containing important information are used in this
manual. The icons appear in the marginal column next to the respective
text.
You will find a detailed explanation of the safety instructions under “Con-
figuration of safety instructions”.
DANGER
A »danger« indicates an imminent risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
causes death or serious injuries.
Example: Electric shock due to high electric voltage.
WARNING
A »warning« indicates a possible risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause death or serious injuries.
Example: Risk of severe crushing of the body caused by heavy loads.
CAUTION
A »caution« indicates a personal health hazard.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
may cause slight to moderate injuries.
Example: Risk of minor crushing of the limbs caused by small loads.
Introduction
.................................................................................................................
Welcome to CALYPSO
CALYPSO was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end, CALYPSO utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward pro- CALYPSO automatically recognizes the geometry features that you probe
gramming and generates probing paths and strategies, retraction movements and
travel paths between the features.
In contrast to conventional software, the styli are qualified with the aid
of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform the first
probing of the reference sphere manually, CALYPSO will perform all of
the remaining steps for you.
In CALYPSO, you enter the measurement parameters in accordance with
a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be inadvertently
omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters in the input me-
nus offer you default values. There are only a few items that call for man-
ual input in CALYPSO, and they are highlighted to draw your attention
to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators, prompts for confirma-
tion, and plausibility checks matching the individual characteristics are all
in place to make sure that you omit nothing and to make measuring as
straightforward as possible.
You see what you're CALYPSO offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
measuring model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every detail
as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option of directly
importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate error-free meas-
urement programs of your own.
Versatile measurement You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without de-
logs lay, and afterwards you can still depend on CALYPSO to help. You can
customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,for ex-
ample you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select full-graphics
display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows appli-
cations, CALYPSO can export the result files, so you can present the data
as graphic or in table form, or in presentation programs whatever you
want.
Starting CALYPSO
1 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click the Ca-
lypso icon.
- or -
Select Start ® Programs ® Zeiss ® CALYPSO 2014 ® CA-
LYPSO 2014.
The Log In window opens and you must identify yourself by entering
the user name and the password.
Exceptions:
– If System login (LDAP) is activated in the User notebook in the
system setup,
CALYPSO sends, via the IP address set, user name and password to
the LDAP server, which will compare this data to the data stored in
the server. If the data corresponds to each other, CALYPSO is started.
However, the prerequisite is that the users are defined with the same
user name and password (pay attention to upper and lower case!),
not only in the system used by the LDAP directory (e.g. the Microsoft
Active Directory) but also in the CALYPSO user management.
– If Automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system
setup, CALYPSO will start automatically without login.
NOTICE
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when log-
ging in.
NOTICE
Never close ACIS Interface when CALYPSO is running.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Measurement plan
area with four tabs
CAD window
CAD icons
The main window and its principal elements are described briefly below:
– Menu bar
The menu bar contains the basic commands for working with CA-
LYPSO.
– Toolbar
Icons allow you to run frequently required commands quickly.
Note: Use the Toolbar Editor to configure the toolbar.
– Measurement plan area
The measurement plan area comprises four tabs. The small squares
of the boxes on the tabs indicate the status of the tab.
CMM Here you find the CMM settings and the stylus system dia-
logs.
Measurement plan This is where you quickly find the important dialogs for pre-
paring the measurement plan.
– CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional model of the work-
piece and each feature. The model is permanently updated when you
define new features or edit existing ones.
Note: The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you
do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD ® View ® Hide CAD View.
– CAD icons
The icons allow you to define features in the CAD window and to
work on their representation.
NOTICE
All changes made in the open windows are accepted and saved auto-
matically.
– Shortcuts
CALYPSO offers a number of general constantly active shortcuts for
calling frequently used menu items and individual functions. For a list
of shortcuts, please refer to ➤List of general shortcuts [⇨ 1‑9].
– ➤Custom shortcuts and short codes [⇨ 1‑10]
In addition to the available shortcuts, you can define your own short-
cuts and short codes (call via F12) and save them in a definition list.
You may activate one of several definition lists depending on your
requirement.
You can also ➤easily create the definition list externally [⇨ 1‑12]
and import it.
– ➤Function call via function list [⇨ 1‑15]
You can call functions using F7 from a continuously updated function
list.
– ➤Function call via name [⇨ 1‑18]
You can use F5 and enter your name to call a function. With auto-
complete, you only have to enter a few characters to select the desired
function.
Shortcut Function
CTRL+N Creating a new measurement plan
CTRL+O Opening a measurement plan
CTRL+S Saving the measurement plan
CTRL+F Opening the Search window
CTRL+H Opening the Replace window
CTRL+A Select All
CTRL+Z Undoing the last action
CTRL+C Copying the selection to the clipboard
CTRL+X Cutting the selection
CTRL+V Pasting the selection from the clipboard
F2 Renaming the selected feature
F5 Function call via entry of name
F7 Calling the function list
F11 New Circle feature and calling the 4-point circle macro
Shortcut Function
F12 Function call via short code
DEL Deleting the selected feature
ESC Closing the box without applying the changes
RETURN Closing the box and applying the changes
RIGHT Opening the feature and characteristic window for the selected fea-
ture
CTRL+RIGHT Opening the strategy window for the selected feature
ALT+RIGHT Opening the evaluation for the selected feature
ALT+F4 Exiting CALYPSO
NOTICE
If a menu item can also be called via a shortcut, this will be shown next
to the menu item.
Custom shortcuts In addition to the general shortcuts, you can define and activate your own
shortcuts and short codes.
Custom shortcuts
Custom shortcuts may be in the following form:
– ALT + LETTER
– ALT + SHIFT + LETTER
NOTICE
The ALT shortcuts of an active definition list overwrite the corresponding
ALT shortcuts for calling the menu items and submenu items of the main
menu. These shortcuts will then be inoperable.
To avoid this, use the shortcuts with ALT + SHIFT.
Short codes
Short codes are used to call defined menu items in the same way as with
shortcuts. The call via short code has the following form:
– F12 + NUMBER
2 In the CALYPSO main menu, select the menu item for which you want
to define a shortcut or a short code.
The selected function will not be executed. A corresponding entry in
the function list will be made instead.
3 To define a shortcut, use the key combination ALT + LETTER or ALT + SHIFT +
LETTER.
Off
functionlist_l
functionlist_2
functionlist_3
OK Cancel
For this purpose, CALYPSO offers a default list containing all menu items
which can be used for assigning shortcuts and short codes. You only need
to edit this list.
1 Select Resources ® Function call ® Numbers and shortcuts
definition.
The Definition numbers and shortcuts dialog box appears on
the screen.
2 Select Edit ® Generate default list in this dialog box.
The dialog box is filled with the complete list of all menu items of the
main window.
Alt Function
New...
Open...
Save
Save As...
Copy to...
Create Merged Measurement Plan
Save Measured Points
Load Measured Points...
Delete Base Alignment...
Print Characteristics
Print Features
Open Macro Measurement Plan...
Define Macro Parameters...
New...
Open...
Save
Save As...
Copy to...
Create Merged Measurement Plan
Save Measured Points
Load Measured Points...
Delete Base Alignment...
Print Characteristics
Print Features
Open Macro Measurement Plan...
Define Macro Parameters...
Save Measurement Plan as Macro
Save Measurement Plan as Macro as...
Integrate Macro...
Update All Macros
Macro > Settings...
Import > DMIS
Export > DMIS
CAD Load settings...
Import Characteristic Attributes...
Undo last probing
Cut
Copy
Copy with References
Function Number
numbshctsdef_1
OK Cancel
2 If you know the number of the desired function, enter the number and
confirm it with OK.
- or -
Otherwise, enter “0” to display the current list of short codes and
select the desired function.
Select function
New...
Open...
Save
Save As...
Copy to...
Create Merged Measurement Plan
Save Measured Points
Load Measured Points
Delete Base Alignment...
Print Characteristics
Print Features
Open Macro Measurement Plan...
OK Cancel
Function lists
The function list is filled automatically with the main menu's menu items
you called and is limited to 20 functions. When exceeding the number
20, the oldest function will be deleted from the list.
NOTICE
The functions called from the function list will also be added again to the
list.
Fixing the selection If you want to permanently keep the functions in the list, you can fix them.
The fixed entries are identified by a preceding underscore and are not
removed from the list.
Function List
File... Edit
a _Environment...
b _Characteristics
c _Features Settings Editor...
d _Result Directories Measurement Plan
e _Error Report...
f _Miscellaneous...
7 Graphics Element
6 CAD
5 Configuration...
4 CMM...
3 Creating features...
2 AutoRun...
1 Search > Features with directories
Fix selection
Execute Close
Saving and loading lists You can save the fixed parts of a function list under a name and reload
them if necessary.
Function List
File... Edit
9 Environment...
8 CMM...
7 Characteristics
6 Features Settings Editor...
5 Result Directories Measurement Plan
4 Error Report...
3 Miscellaneous...
2 Graphics Element
1 Definition numbers and shortcuts
Fix selection
Execute Close
4 To save the fixed part of a function list under another name, select
File ® Save As.
5 To load a saved fixed function list, select File ® Open and select the
desired fixed function list.
6 To delete a line from the function list, highlight it and select Ed-
it ® Cut.
7 To empty the complete list, select Edit ® Clear List.
8 To ensure that a function list is already active when starting CALYPSO,
select File ® Auto active list and select the desired fixed list in the
Select definition (Current list will be replaced) dialog box.
If you select Off, no function list will be active at the next start.
Entry of name
CAD-E
Modify CAD Entities...
Combine CAD Features
Cancel
NOTICE
The descriptions in this document are based on a two-button mouse.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
For further information, please refer to the operating instructions of the
corresponding 3D mouse.
Touch settings Hold down Ctrl key when making multiple selection in lists
Guide
OK
2 Tick the Use typewriter for inputs check box in the Touch set-
tings branch in the User Interface Settings dialog box.
3 Click OK.
Each time you click in an input field, the Typewriter dialog box will be
called.
Toolbar editor
Use the Toolbar Editor to customize the toolbar to fit your require-
ments.
This provides all the functions of the menus that have graphical icons, as
well as the additional icons of the toolbar.
NOTICE
In every configuration, the right end of the toolbar forms the icon group
for stylus administration. This stylus group cannot be deleted, and its
icons cannot be selected.
You can only add icons to the toolbar according to the space available
above the main window. As soon as the space has been used up, the
toolbar editor refuses to insert additional icons.
Toolbar per user The toolbar is saved on a user-specific basis: After you have logged in,
CALYPSO automatically displays your toolbar.
Saving and loading tool- You can save and load toolbars. The toolbars are saved as “*.config” files.
bars
Restoring the standard The standard toolbar can be restored using Presetting and activated
for your main window using Apply.
Restructuring toolbars
Use the Toolbar Editor to specify which icons appear in what order in the
toolbar.
Touch settings Hold down Ctrl key when making multiple selection in lists
Guide
OK
Docking windows
1 Select View ® Configuration.
The User Interface Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Enable the User Interface branch.
3 Tick the Dock Custom Printout and Dock toolbox check boxes
on the right under User Interface.
Customizing a menu
1 Select View ® Configuration.
The User Interface Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Enable the Menu branch.
Menu File
Guide View
Resources
Features
Construct
Size
CNC
CAD
Extras
Planner
Window
?
OK
3 Activate the main menu's menu items and submenu items you want
to use in the tree view on the right under Menu.
4 Press Export to export this menu configuration in a cal file and to use
it on other systems.
5 Press Import to import an existing cal file and to use it on your system.
6 Press Default to reset the default settings.
Assistant
Feature Recognition
Feature assignment
Features
There are two types of feature in CALYPSO:
– A physical feature of a workpiece such as planes (lateral surfaces) and
cylinders (holes),etc.
– A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of this
nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes, for ex-
ample.
Automatic feature rec- CALYPSO automatically recognizes most geometric elements as you
ognition move the CMM stylus to probe them. The software's measurement al-
gorithm is “smart” and takes into account the location of measurement
points as well as the probing direction. For example, if you take meas-
urements at three points on a workpiece, CALYPSO will determine
whether the feature is a line, plane or circle.
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. You use characteristics to specify
the dimensions, shape or location of features along with any applicable
nominal and tolerance values (e.g. the diameter of a hole, the perpendi-
cularity of a hole to a plane and the distance between two planes).
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is the CALYPSO version of what you might be fa-
miliar with as a “part program” or “control data”. A measurement plan
contains the information the system needs to perform a measurement,
for example:
– the characteristics with their tolerances
– the features
– the names of the stylus systems
Coordinate systems
For exact location definition and reliable performance of measurements,
precisely defined and convertible coordinate systems are essential.
Machine coordinate sys- The machine coordinate system is the basis of travel commands and
tem measurements of the CMM. For concrete measurements on a workpiece,
however, this is impractical. A coordinate system referred to the work-
piece must be used as the user-defined reference coordinate system of a
measurement plan.
Part alignment A part alignment is bound to the workpiece. For CALYPSO and the CMM,
it locates the position and alignment of the workpiece on the measuring
table. There may be several part alignments for a single workpiece.
Base alignment One of the part alignments is defined as the base alignment for the
measurement plan. All other part alignments can be converted to this
base alignment.
Local feature alignment In addition, you can also use the local feature alignment for each feature;
the zero point and alignment of this coordinate system are defined in a
specified manner by the feature.
Clearance planes
Six planes define a safe area around a part and any associated fixture
where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the clearance
zone formed by these planes, the stylus can be moved without risk of
collision.
CALYPSO determines the part's clearance planes using only two posi-
tions.
NOTICE
To simulate measuring results, you can generate actual values that differ
from the nominal values due to translation and random dispersion. The
dispersion and translation are set under Extras ® Settings ® Meas-
urement.
DME Interface When using CALYPSO with the DME interface, you can control all CMMs
supporting the DME interface.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics and
features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan. This means
that random samples taken from series production can be measured au-
tomatically without any need for manual probing.
Licensing
Licenses for options and measurement plans
Options You can only use an option if the appropriate license is installed on your
system. The licenses installed on your computer are shown in CALYPSO
under Extras ® Settings ® Miscellaneous on the Licenses note-
book page.
Protected measurement Furthermore, licenses for individual measurement plans created and pro-
plans tected by Carl Zeiss are also available. To run such a measurement plan,
the corresponding license is required.
Activating licenses
1 To do so, select Extras ® Settings ® Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.
The Academy Web Login window shows the internet address and
the registration code. At the first call, the button is called Register
and then it is called Open.
2 Open the access page of Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:
• If your CALYPSO computer is equipped with internet access: Click
Register or Open.
• If you want to open the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy on
another computer with internet access: Enter the indicated access
address (with registration code) in a Web Browser.
The access page of the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy opens.
Your registration code is already entered under Register User.
3 Use a login name and a password to log in for the first time to the
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
From now on you can log in at any time to the Carl Zeiss Metrology
Academy by using your selected login name and your password and
use the offered options.
Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
1 Select File ® Exit.
CALYPSO prompts you to save or reject the changes. CALYPSO then
closes the CALYPSO User Desk, logs you off in CALYPSO and dis-
plays the Log In window.
2 To leave a message for the following users, click the Memos button
and enter your message in the Memo Editor.
Note: If system login or automatic login is activated in the User note-
book in the system settings, then this window is skipped when logging
in and logging off.
3 Click the Terminate button in the Log In window.
CALYPSO is terminated and all dialog boxes opened by CALYPSO (e.g.
Simulation, Events) are closed.
NOTICE
The folder names depend on the language of the installed Windows ver-
sion. If you install the English Windows version, the folders, too, will have
English designations.
To display the folder names in the address line in the installation lan-
guage, a certain INI file must be available for each folder. If this file is
missing, this folder will be shown with the English designation.
The program files and the user data are located in the following directo-
ries in CALYPSO 2014:
– CALYPSO program directory
Windows XP: C:Programme\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.8
Windows 7: C:\Programs (x86)\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.8
– CALYPSO user directory
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss
\CALYPSO
Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Zeiss\Calypso
– CALYPSO program data directory
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data
\Zeiss\Calypso 5.8
Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Zeiss\Calypso 5.8
– CALYPSO temporary data directory
To get access to the temporary data, enter the following in the address
line of the Windows Explorer:
Windows XP: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.8
Windows 7: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.8
NOTICE
In the address line of the Windows Explorer, some folders are displayed
with a different designation than that shown in the navigation bar. For
example, the name of the folder Shared documents is shown with the
abbreviated name Documents in the address line.
However, the folder name shown in the navigation bar is important.
NOTICE
The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you do not
require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD ® View ® Hide CAD View.
Showing the CAD model A three-dimensional model of the loaded CAD file is shown. You can
supplement the data and set the model to obtain a “photo-realistic map-
ping” of the workpiece.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window with the mouse.
Using a 3D mouse For convenient rotation and displacement of the CAD model, you can also
use a 3D mouse, e.g. the “SpaceNavigator” by 3DConnexion.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
Interactive processing If you use a measurement plan, the selected feature is shown on the CAD
model. You can process features and define new features.
The points to be probed are shown in the CAD window during the manual
CNC run.
Saving a CAD model You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. If a workpiece is to be processed with different measurement
plans, you require less memory space by saving it separately.
Outputting the CAD You can include a saved CAD model in your evaluations and, for example,
model as plot output it as a plot (see in the Online Help under ➤Outputting the CAD
window as a plot [⇨ 2‑55]).
Stylus simulation If you have the Simulation option, you can display the stylus system in use
in the CAD window and trace the stylus movements during the CNC run
or its simulation (see Simulation (option) in the Online Help).
Showing the work area You can define the representation of the CMM, the stylus changer rack
and the clamping device and save it as a work area. Depending on the
requirements of the corresponding measurement plan, you load the ap-
propriate work area in addition.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window - depending on the
type of view required.
NOTICE
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. By editing the displayed
CAD model, you do not edit the CAD data on which it is based.
Load settings If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
Depending on the setting, only one view of the CAD model or only the
number of geometric elements is loaded:
– You can modify the view of the CAD model but you cannot extract
any features from it.
– In the display of the geometric elements, the CAD model is not shown.
Saving a CAD model sep- You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
arately separately. Define the type of saving in the Settings (CAD) window which
you open via CAD ® Settings. The measurement plan “remembers”
where the CAD model is stored and loads it from there into the CAD
window.
By saving a measurement plan, the CAD model is saved either together
with the measurement plan or not at all, depending on the setting.
If you save the CAD model separately, you can use it for several meas-
urement plans. It is not possible to process this “external CAD model” in
an individual measurement plan.
NOTICE
You can save only one CAD model per measurement plan.
If you want to edit a workpiece which consists of several CAD files, you
must load all files before you save them together.
NOTICE
By saving the measurement plan, the work area is not saved.
Defining the work area The elements of the work area as well as the workpiece are defined by
means of CAD data.
1 Select CAD ® Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierar-
chy tab.
2 Deselect the Part setting in the context menu of the CAD entity and
select Work Area.
Thus, the selected CAD entity is assigned to the work area.
Positioning CAD entities The Position function allows you to compile your work area by means of
CAD entities and to position it on the base plate.
1 Select CAD ® Modify CAD Entities and activate the Position-
ing tab.
2 Set the offset and rotation of the desired CAD entity.
• The Position function executes the positioning of the entity.
• Use Repeat to carry out again the previous transformation.
Saving the work area A defined work area must be saved to use it again.
1 Select Planner ® Save Work Area.
The work area is saved in <user directory>\workarea\CAD-workarea.
Loading the work area You can add a defined and saved work area to your measurement plan.
1 Select Planner ® Load Work Area.
2 Select the desired work area and click Load.
CAD window
CAD icons
Most of the functions can also be selected from the CAD menu.
Working away from the The CAD file of the workpiece allows you to work your way through the
machine preparations without using the CMM. You use the mouse to define fea-
tures and their probing points.
You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.
NOTICE
Most of these settings can also be made via CAD ® Settings in the
Settings (CAD) window under Model Display.
This mode remains active until you switch to the Use mouse to Pan
CAD image or Rotate mode.
Load View
Isometric (three-dimensional)
NOTICE
The step width for rotating the CAD model must be set in Settings (CAD)
under Handling.
The upper right area is your CAD work area. The three smaller areas each
show the CAD model from a different axis direction.
NOTICE
The CAD model must be saved under a name before it can be output as
a plot.
Changing settings
1 Select CAD ® Settings.
2 Select in the tree view in the Settings (CAD) window to the left the
desired branch to open the tab.
6 Click Comparison.
CALYPSO compares the entities of the new CAD model with the prob-
ing points of the features in the measurement plan. The features,
whose probing points are separated from the corresponding CAD en-
tity less than the specified distance, are shown in the list under Fea-
tures inside tolerance.
Under Features outside tolerance, all features are shown that
are outside the specified distance to a CAD entity.
7 Click the desired entity in the modification list.
In the CAD window, the feature from the measurement plan to which
the CAD entity marked in the list can be adapted is highlighted in color
and the CAD model is rotated so that the feature is visible. If you ticked
the Show strategy when selecting Feature check box under
Strategy in the Settings (CAD) window, then the strategy of the
feature is also highlighted in color.
Note: Double-click the line to open the definition template for the
feature. You can compare the element's plan values with the actually
measured values. Similarly, the next surface is highlighted in the CAD
window. This ensures that CALYPSO has recognized the right feature.
8 To adapt the feature to the new data of the corresponding CAD entity,
click with the mouse the feature in the CAD window.
• - or -
• Mark in the modification list those lines that you want to transfer
to the measurement plan and click Apply.
The adapted feature is shown in italics in the modification list and
moved to the end of the list Features inside tolerance.
If the feature could not be adapted, it is shown in italics in the modi-
fication list and moved to the end of the list Features outside tol-
erance.
9 Click Close to terminate the comparison.
10Save the measurement plan.
2 To add a new group, select Add Group in the context menu of the
supper hierarchy level.
When grouping, individual CAD entities or entire groups are shifted
hierarchically.
3 To shift CAD entities, select the CAD entities to be shifted and drag
them to the target group.
Overview of transformations
Use local alignments to position work area elements and workpieces in
the CAD window. All positioning and location processes take place in
these coordinate systems.
It is possible to transform CAD entities and coordinate systems. To trans-
form an object, assign a coordinate system to the object in the CAD
model. The object is transformed along the coordinate axes of this coor-
dinate system.
3 Click the desired position or the CAD entity in the CAD window.
A local alignment is inserted at the corresponding place parallel to the
coordinate system defined in the CAD entity.
Note: By ticking the Center check box before adding the alignment,
the coordinate system with its origin is automatically positioned in the
center of the surface or feature you clicked.
4 Repeat step 3 for the desired number of coordinate systems.
5 Then click again Create to deactivate the button.
6 Close the dialog box.
5 Activate the Center check box if the rotation should refer to a coor-
dinate system parallel to the axis in the center of gravity of the CAD
entity.
Otherwise, the rotation refers to the origin of the selected coordinate
system.
6 Select Apply to move the CAD entity to the defined position and to
rotate it.
Edit
Identifier pointsCloud
Filename CT
Number of Points
Color
Deviation Calculation
Calculate Tolerance
Exact Angle
View
Magnification
Properties...
Invert Deviations
Close
2 Select the entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the Hi-
erarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Edit body tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
• You can delete the entity or entities or reverse the normal vectors
of all surfaces.
• You can (logically) combine several solid bodies.
• You can name the solid body.
• You can choose the color of the solid body.
4 Click the corresponding symbol.
5 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.
Circle Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
necessary, enter an Offset. must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
If full circle has been activated, the
full circle will also be created when
clicking a circular arc.
Ellipse Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
necessary, enter an Offset. must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
Slot Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with at least four edges
necessary, enter an Offset. must be highlighted.
Rectangle Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with four edges must be
necessary, enter an Offset. highlighted.
Line Click the symbol on the left. An edge must be marked.
Multiple crea- Click the symbol on the left. Creates all selected or marked ele-
tion ments in one cycle.
Curve Click the Curve symbol and enter The vector normal to the plane of
the desired number of points under intersection is automatically calcu-
Points. lated for each point.
By activating Per Segment, each
segment has the same number of
points.
Point Click the CAD model. The comput- The entered coordinates are pro-
ed coordinates appear in the input jected orthogonally onto the CAD
fields. You can correct the coordi- surface. The position of the point
nates subsequently or enter ap- feature represents the perpendicu-
proximate values from the outset. lar base point.
Select the point mode. Click the Simultaneously, the normal for the
Point symbol. point feature is computed from the
CAD model.
2 Select the CAD entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the ALT key).
Use the mouse to draw a rectangle and mark all entities in the rec-
tangle.
3 Activate the Points tab.
4 Select the Curve option under Feature to be created and confirm
with OK.
The new 3D curve is created and added to the list of features.
4 Select the type of feature you want to create from the points.
5 Enter parameters for creating the space-point grid.
6 Click Create.
The new space points are shown in the CAD model.
7 If you would like to adjust the parameters based on the display: Click
Delete and repeat the steps after step 4.
8 To add the displayed space points to the list of features: Click Create
Feature.
The feature selected above is created from the space points in the CAD
model.
9 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.
3 To return to the view of the entire model, click Show all Calypso
Features.
The PointX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the
serial number of the defined points in your measurement plan.
Defining a circle
This option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the
machine.
Conditions:
– Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the circle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Circle on a Cylinder
from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a cylindrical or tapered bore or an external cyl-
inder in the CAD window.
The CircleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined circles in your measurement plan.
Defining a 2D line
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
– Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the 2D line in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Line on a Plane from
the selection list.
2 Draw a line while holding down the left mouse button.
The 2-D LineX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined 2D lines in your measurement plan.
Defining a rectangle
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Conditions:
– Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the rectangle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Rectangle from the se-
lection list.
2 Click the depiction of a rectangular body in the CAD window.
3 Select a point of the body.
- or -
If the specification of an individual point is not sufficient, select another
point.
The “RectangleX” feature is included in the list of features. X repre-
sents here the serial number of the defined rectangle in your meas-
urement plan.
1 For selection and definition, choose Select Alignment from the se-
lection list.
The CAD model shows all its coordinate systems with offset and ro-
tations.
2 Click the desired coordinate system.
A new coordinate system with already assigned special functions is
added to the measurement plan.
Extracting features
This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the plane, cone and cylinder features in the CAD window
with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Extract Features from the se-
lection list.
2 Make sure that features or characteristics are shown in the measure-
ment plan area.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If you produced a plane, you will have to define a measurement strat-
egy for this plane (see ➤Measurement strategies for fea-
tures [⇨ 4‑163]).
The feature with the addition “X” after the name is included in the list of
features. X represents here the serial number of the defined features in
your measurement plan.
Displaying results
1 Select CAD ® Evaluation.
2 Make the settings on the Result tab in the Results Presenta-
tion window.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If this does not happen, there might not be any actual points
yet.
Displaying characteristics
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in the CAD win-
dow.
1 Select CAD ® Evaluation.
2 Select on the Characteristics index card in the Results Presen-
tation window the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.
Displaying features
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the corresponding characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in
the CAD window.
Modifying a representation
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can modify the meas-
ured data, e.g. invert the deviations or load and use the corrections.
Modifying results
1 Select CAD ® Evaluation.
2 Select on the Modification tab in the Results Presentation win-
dow the data to be modified and saved.
3 Close the window.
NOTICE
By clicking Apply to all, the changes are entered immediately in the
Results Presentation window.
With CAD ® View ® Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload them.
NOTICE
With CAD ® View ® Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload the changes made.
Command Function
Path generation Generates the paths defined in the presettings and the strategy on the
CAD model. With rotationally symmetrical features, default paths are
created.
Show Nominal Shows the nominal points according to the settings made under Prop-
Points erties.
Show Actual Points Shows the actual points in green and red according to the settings made
under Properties. The points shown in red will not be considered for
the evaluation. This menu item will only be available once the measure-
ment has been completed.
Show Masked Points Shows the masked actual points in green and red according to the set-
tings made under Properties. The points shown in red will not be
considered for the evaluation. This menu item will only be available once
the measurement has been completed.
2D View Aligns the curve's plane perpendicular to the operator's position (top
view, only with 2D curves).
Create Solid Feature Allows probing generated features (not on the CAD model) as inside
features.
Magnification Shows a magnified view of the curve. Select the magnification factor
from the submenu.
Properties Opens the Meas. Point Display window with the settings for displaying
the feature's nominal and actual points.
Basic steps for creating a measurement plan Refer to this section for details
Step 1: Open the measurement plan. ➤Creating a new measurement
plan [⇨ 3‑3]
Step 2: Define the naming conventions. ➤Specifying feature names in the
measurement plan [⇨ 6‑18]
Step 3: Carry out the preparations. ➤Measurement Plan tab [⇨ 3‑11]
Step 4: Define the part's features that you want to measure. ➤Defining features [⇨ 4‑2]
Step 5: Define the characteristics for which these features Defining characteristics
are to be checked for compliance.
Step 6: Save the measurement plan and name it. ➤Saving and naming the measure-
ment plan [⇨ 3‑4]
Step 7: Prepare the execution. ➤CMM tab [⇨ 3‑11]
Step 8: Run your measurement plan. ➤Starting a measurement [⇨ 7‑2]
Changing the sequence You can also change the order: You can lay out the sequence of charac-
teristics first (step 5) and then begin defining features (step 4) and asso-
ciating them to characteristics.
Creating a new measure- You have several options for creating measurement plans:
ment plan automatically
Resources → Presettings
Stylus – Preassign stylus system for Measurement Plan
autom.
– Stylus Check at CNC Start
– Exchange stylus system name / stylus in meas-
urement plan
Measurement Plan – Rack Assignment
Preassignment for New Features – Default alignment and default projection plane
for new features
Save / Load Defaults – Default filtering and outlier elimination for new
characteristics and features
– Default strategies for new features
– CAD presettings
Space Point Mode – Evaluation and method of stylus data correc-
tion during point measurement
Name for output files – Definition of the output files via PCM formulas
Tab Settings
Filter/Outlier Defaults for filtering and outlier setting for the following new features
for the entire measurement plan:
– Characteristics of the type Size
– Characteristics of the type Location
– Characteristics of the type Form (except for GDT Line Profile, Pro-
file and Curve Form for free form surfaces)
– References in characteristics and alignment features in coordinate
systems
Strategy Strategy defaults which are effective throughout the measurement
plan for new features of the following types:
– Point
– 2D Line
– Plane
– Circle
– Cylinder
– Cone
CAD Defaults for the entire measurement plan used for visualization in the
CAD window. You can also make these settings under CAD ® Set-
tings in the Settings (CAD) window.
General The three settings combined in one file. This file does not refer to
individual files but contains the definitions of the three tabs.
Be sure to check all settings at the Position, Angle and Size global
radio buttons.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the selection box
of the feature in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Click OK.
This window is fully described in Features representation in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.
Outlier Elimination
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Characteristics List of characteristics in the order in which the characteristics are car-
ried out in the CNC run
(➤Characteristics tab [⇨ 5‑4])
Features List of features
(➤Features tab [⇨ 4‑4])
Status of prerequisites The indicator boxes on the CMM and Measurement Plan tabs reflect
the combined status of the prerequisites:
– Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the prerequi-
sites in question before you can run the measurement plan. Manual
measurements, however, can be performed.
– Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work, however.
– Green: All prerequisites are completed.
CMM Settings
Stylus system
Star
Whether or not you include the measurement plan settings and temper-
ature compensation depends on the intended application.
Status of results On the Characteristics tab, the indicator box reflects the results after
the measurement:
– Red: One or more characteristics are red.
– Yellow: One or more characteristics are yellow.
– Green: All characteristics are within the tolerance.
CMM tab
The measurement plan area of the CMM tab contains buttons for ma-
chine-specific preparations.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections:
– CMM Settings: This button indicates the status of the CMM and the
connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. If the CMM has not
been initialized and referenced, the button is red (see ➤Connecting
the CMM [⇨ 3‑13]).
– Stylus system: By means of this button, the stylus system installed at
the moment is qualified (see ➤Preparing the stylus sys-
tem [⇨ 3‑15]).
– Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the CMM
and CALYPSO to home the CMM.
NOTICE
When using a rotary table, you must redefine the rotary table axis after
the CMM has been homed. This is the prerequisite for using the rotary
table. For more information, see ➤Prerequisites for the rotary ta-
ble [⇨ 3‑55].
NOTICE
All reference spheres used are no longer valid after a home position travel.
Before you can reuse the reference spheres, you must determine their
position again via the master stylus.
– Red: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is not
qualified or not permitted for the measurement.
Qualifying styli Qualification means that the stylus probes the reference sphere and stylus
correction values are determined from the results. The compliance with
the limit values can be checked automatically by CALYPSO.
When qualifying the stylus, observe the following:
– Always define and qualify stylus systems and styli within a measure-
ment plan. You can use defined stylus systems with qualified styli in
all other measurement plans.
– The stylus system that you use to set up a measurement plan must be
the same one that you use to run the measurement plan.
Note: If the stylus system can no longer be used, but you have a stylus
system with the same configuration, select Resources ® Stylus
system ® Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan to select the suitable stylus system.
– In the list of the prerequisites, the name of the stylus system is dis-
played that was most recently used for measuring. When opening a
measurement plan, you must use the appropriate stylus system. To
display the stylus system to be used, choose Resources ® Stylus
system ® Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan.
Further information In the following sections you will find the instructions on how to insert or
change a stylus system manually and to quality an already qualified stylus
system.
For more information about stylus systems and styli of different types as
well as stylus system management, please refer to the chapter ➤Styli and
stylus systems [⇨ 11‑1].
For information about the automatic stylus change, please refer to the
chapter ➤Stylus system changer [⇨ 13‑1].
2 If you want to install an SP600 and change the stylus system (SP600
plate): Remove the stylus system manually from the SP600 and pro-
ceed with step 5.
- or -
If you want to install an SP600 and change the probe (RDS plate), as
well as in all other cases: Click the red arrow in the left half of the
window.
The message “Stylus system will be released in 5 seconds” appears on
the screen.
3 Click OK.
4 Carefully grip the stylus system that is about to be ejected.
After five seconds, the CMM ejects the stylus system.
If a trigger probe is involved, deviate the stylus system slightly to be
able to remove it from the holder.
Measuring probes are ejected fully automatically, i.e. you must be holding
the stylus system in your hand at this time.
CT Properties
CT dataset
File Name
Properties
Gradient Threshold
Smooth Area mm
Search Path mm
Avoid Oversampling
Visualize CT dataset
OK Reset
NOTICE
In order to work with base alignments/start alignments, you need to be
familiar with automatic feature recognition (see ➤Defining features us-
ing automatic feature recognition [⇨ 4‑14]).
The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignment are as
follows:
– ➤Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [⇨ 3‑23]
If there is an existing base/start alignment, you can use it for your
current measurement plan.
– ➤Creating a new base/start alignment [⇨ 3‑24]
You can create a new base / start alignment. There are several ways
of creating a base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one
(see ➤Alternative alignment methods [⇨ 3‑49]).
– ➤Adapting a base / start alignment [⇨ 3‑27]
If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part alignment
is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without having to re-
define the base/start alignment from scratch.
– ➤Editing an existing base/start alignment [⇨ 3‑33]
The settings (e.g. a primary reference) of an open (active) base or start
alignment can be changed at any time.
– ➤Moving or rotating the base / start alignment [⇨ 3‑34]
You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to cus-
tomize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece.
– ➤Deleting a base alignment [⇨ 3‑49]
– ➤Setting a base alignment to zero [⇨ 3‑49]
For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template. The
part alignment template is described in full detail in Definition template
(Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
Part alignments
The part alignment is the user-defined reference coordinate system for
your measurement plan. The base alignment (see also ➤Base align-
ment [⇨ 3‑21]) is a particular part alignment. It localizes the part on the
measuring table for the CMM. Why is that necessary?
In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out of
line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start meas-
uring you have to define (compute) the position of the workpiece relative
to the axes of the CMM.
This is precisely what happens when the part alignment is computed: the
part alignment is virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric ele-
ments of the workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes.
The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six constraints
(three rotational and three translational).
The part alignment is based on five references:
– The primary reference (Rotate Space) restricts two of the three rota-
tional degrees of freedom; e.g., the rotation around the X and Y axes.
– The secondary reference (Rotate Plane) constrains the third rotational
degree of freedom, e.g., rotation around the Z axis.
– Three tertiary references control the three translational constraints.
These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part alignment is
defined.
You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan. You
can define a new part alignment using Resources ® Utilit-
ies ® Alignment or with the toolbox.
Selecting the coordinate The known coordinate systems in the measurement plan can be selected
system and used at various positions of the measurement plan:
– Features and constructions
– The start coordinate system for a coordinate system according to the
standard method
– True Position, Profile, Simple distance characteristics
– Erosion Module utility, Save Alignment
– Display position and “Move in Part Alignment System” in the stop
light window
– Additional Features HOLOS and GEAR PRO
NOTICE
The type of brackets selected in the loop is passed along with the index
as is the number.
n different coordinate systems are calculated for a coordinate system that
has a feature with pattern and n positions. When several references con-
tain patterns with varying number of positions, the resulting coordinate
system contains exactly as many positions as the reference having the
smallest number of positions.
Example: A circle and two planes have one pattern with ten features each.
If you use these features as references for the coordinate system, a co-
ordinate system with index is formed. This coordinate system can take on
from one to ten different positions or alignments depending on the spe-
cific index value.
NOTICE
A coordinate system provided with a loop is interpreted as an iterative
alignment. For this reason, coordinate systems that should be calculated
with an index should have no loop.
Base alignment
The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of the
workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every meas-
urement plan. In order to view, define or change the base alignment, read
➤Creating a new base/start alignment [⇨ 3‑24].
The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine coordinate
system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan, on the other
hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to other alignments.
They are used for the correct evaluation of the measuring results.
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features you
want to use for defining the workpiece position on the CMM. If these
features have already been measured, the current workpiece position will
be calculated and saved.
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, for example, the work-
piece position cannot be calculated until later. This can be accomplished
by loading a saved base alignment (see ➤Loading an existing base align-
ment/start alignment [⇨ 3‑23]) or by manually adapting a defined base
alignment (see ➤Adapting a base / start alignment [⇨ 3‑27]).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:
– The assignments of the features to the 5 references of the base align-
ment are saved in the measurement plan.
– The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a file.
Start alignment
A part alignment is referred to as a start alignment when it can be used
as a provisional base alignment. It must be possible to generate it by
manual probing and can be permitted only once in a measurement plan.
What is the purpose of a A start alignment is used in the following situations:
start alignment? – Generating the base alignment through manual probing would be
relatively complex.
This is the case, for example, when constructions are entered into the
base alignments that, in turn, have been formed from several other
features. Then many features are necessary for generating the base
alignment.
This applies also when features which are difficult to probe are used
for generating the base alignment.
– A receptacle is used holding the workpiece.
Then the start alignment is defined on the receptacle and the base
alignment on the workpiece.
Simple structure A start alignment can be built up relatively simple. Depending on the
individual case it can, for example, be built by a 3-2-1 alignment, by simple
features or also by one point in X, Y and Z each.
For a CNC run with manual alignment, it is then sufficient to probe these
few points or features. Afterward, CALYPSO knows the approximate po-
sition of the workpiece and can qualify the base alignment in the CNC
run.
NOTICE
Always define the base alignment first, and then the start alignment.
Otherwise, the offset between the base alignment and the start align-
ment cannot be correctly calculated.
Defining start alignment The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and with
the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use the Start
This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five refer-
ences. CALYPSO automatically enters the information in the fields
when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already measured
the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control con-
sole.
7 Define a feature for the reference. There are a number of possibilities:
The feature already exists: – Click the appropriate button of the reference.
– The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
– Select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
– Click OK.
CALYPSO transfers the feature to the appropriate field.
The feature does not exist in If you are working on the CMM:
the measurement plan as – You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box.
yet:
– Probe point by point.
– The automatic feature recognition engine of CALYPSO automat-
ically registers the geometry of the feature.
– Click OK when you have fully defined the feature as a reference.
CALYPSO will automatically transfer the feature to the measurement
plan.
If you are working away from the machine:
– Click the appropriate button of the reference in the Align-
ment dialog box.
– The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
– Select the New option.
– Click the appropriate button of the feature you want to define.
– Click OK.
– In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of points
on the feature with the mouse.
- or -
– Click one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define Cir-
cle on a Cylinder, Define 2-D Line or Extract Features
to import the entire feature right away.
CALYPSO updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.
– Click OK.
8 Define the features for the other references in the same way.
The default name for the measurement plan is derived from the name of
the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the
name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click the Com-
ment button to type in and save a comment containing additional in-
formation.
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature has to
be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment. This dialog
box is fully described in Manual Alignment in the CALYPSO dialog ref-
erence in the Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the in-
dicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is up-
dated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often you
have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a reference, the window displays
the feature needed for the next reference (such as 2D Line1).
After the probing, CALYPSO takes a moment to update the part align-
ment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then you are
returned to the Alignment window.
7 Click OK.
The Base / Start Alignment icon will then be green.
When adjusting the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position will
be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the model in the CAD window does not change.
NOTICE
The Automatic Run check box has to be ticked in the definition tem-
plate of the base alignment.
If you use an abortion condition instead of defining the end of the loop
by specifying a certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target
precision for the new part alignment.
If a space point measured with the Point Set strategy is used for the def-
inition of the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed itera-
tion, i.e. without remeasuring.
1 In the Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box, ac-
tivate the radio button for the Change current base alignment
option.
2 Click Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click Add.
4 Enter in the End field, e.g., “5” as number of the loop cycles.
5 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and
select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter an abortion condition, for example
the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and when
it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is stopped. The
value of the valueA variable is recalculated each time the loop is run.
It stands for the approximation between the measured alignment and
the alignment stored in memory. In the standard protocol, valueA is
designated as “Delta”.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load, Create Or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
If a Space Point feature measured with the Point Set strategy is used
in the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration.
8 To do so, click Iterative alignment and enter the parameters for
computed iteration.
For computed iteration, the point set is not remeasured but the meas-
ured point set is evaluated again. For more information, see ➤Align-
ment by means of computed iteration [⇨ 3‑30].
9 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece has not been moved
since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece, align-
ment is computed iteratively – until the difference (delta) between two
consecutive alignments is less than the value you specified (0.05).
Refer to the default printout for information on the alignment procedure
and the results, including the value for delta.
Parameters for comput- You can define the parameters for each Space Point feature individually
ed iteration or for all features used in the coordinate system. CALYPSO checks the
entries and issues warning messages:
– Search radius
If the specified search radius is too small, e.g. smaller than the step
width of the scanning strategy, CALYPSO can find a maximum of one
point. If the specified value is too large, e.g. larger than the expansion
of the scanning strategy, the distance between the points and the
target position is too large and the computation is inaccurate (see ill.).
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coor-
dinate system, CALYPSO uses the largest step width and the smallest
expansion of all scanning strategies as basis.
Search radius
Point set
Target position
After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start Align-
ment icon must be green. When a base / start alignment is changed, the
nominal values of all of the features in the current measurement plan will
be changed. The position of the base/start alignment relative to the work-
piece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only
measured features are used.
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin in the X,Y
or Z axis:
7 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the alignment to be ro-
tated, and the angle (in degrees):
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the system to be rotated,
and the vector for rotation.
Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate system
of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends on the selected
axis of rotation).
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
Option Function
Rotate to Distance (to a given Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific
axis) coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to origin line Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line passing
through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the tertiary
reference (measured point) in the plane. After this rotation, the X
value and Y value of the nominal point and the tertiary reference have
same ratios.
Rotate to same deviation Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line between
a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the tertiary refer-
ence has a slope of 45°. After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y
of the nominal point and the tertiary reference are equal (delta-X
(delta-Y) is the difference between the two X values (Y values)).
Rotate to Distance
Use the Rotate to Distance function to enter a desired value on the
coordinate axis for a feature. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment until
it is set to this value.
Example The following example illustrates the function:
The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X axis. This distance should
maintain the nominal of 40 mm.
50
CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the nominal distance is achieved.
40
When using the “Rotate to origin line” function, CALYPSO rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
X act
Y nom
X nom
In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X values and
the Y values for both points (the one defined by the line and the point
for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The “Rotate to origin line” is
in a sense a “Rotate to Equal Relationships”.
Example The following example illustrates the function:
The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through the
origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the “Rotate to origin line” function has been performed, the line
should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CALYPSO
rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the line
touches the center of the bore on the right.
Nominal coordinates
Y
X
In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X values (be-
tween the just defined point and the point of the tertiary reference) equals
the difference between the Y values – which is why it is called “Rotate to
same deviation”.
Example The following example illustrates the function:
The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system;
it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the “Rotate to same deviation” function has been performed, the
line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CA-
LYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until
the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
Enter
distance
NOTICE
Both the Load alignment for secondary reference and the Ref-
erence axis setting in secondary reference options thus cancel
one another.
Measurement plan al- Also in an already existing measurement plan it is possible to load the
ready exists secondary reference of the base/start alignment from another base/start
alignment. This, however, is only practical if the following conditions are
met:
– The primary alignments of the current and stored base/start alignment
are approximately the same.
Otherwise, the nominal data is offset so much by the transformation after
the loading of the secondary reference that no normal measurement is
possible any longer.
NOTICE
It is not admissible to enter just any base alignment as secondary align-
ment and then do the qualifying of the alignment thereafter.
Sequential order during If the workpiece on the machine has been displaced and it thereby be-
adjustment comes necessary to re-qualify the base/start alignment, you must always
qualify the base/start alignment first and load its secondary reference af-
terward. Not until afterward do you redefine the base/start alignment in
which you want to load the secondary reference.
Z Stored
alignment
Y
Spatial
X
orientation
and origin in
Z
Origin in
X and Y
The determined axis direction of the existing system forms, together with
the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment, an angle smaller
than or equal to 45°.
For the secondary alignment, one of the two other axes of the existing
base/start alignment is used:
It is now important for the new coordinate system to know for which axis
direction (in the new coordinate system) the axis of the existing system
determined above is to be used:
The primary direction (of the new alignment) is found in the first line, the
secondary axis is below it.
Other requirements
The following situation is presented as an example: There are two meas-
urement plans – one, to measure the plane rotation on a fixture, and a
second, to measure the workpiece on the fixture.
If the base alignment of the plane rotation was re-qualified (e.g., because
the fixture was moved or turned about) and now it is switched over to
the other measurement plan, a very difficult situation develops.
The plane rotation was changed but the base alignment of the workpiece
is still in the same position. This can be compared to the following: A
workpiece was defined on the machine by probings (with complete base
alignment). Now the workpiece is turned about and a new plane is meas-
ured. This plane is now replaced by the feature of the current plane ro-
tation of the base alignment. The consequence is: When the base align-
ment window is opened and closed again, all nominal geometries are
calculated again (shifting of the CAD model) due to the fact that the
actual features of the primary and tertiary alignments were not likewise
measured again.
To compensate for this, the base alignment is calculated from the nominal
geometries again when the base alignment window opens. If the stored
alignment has not changed, the nominal base alignment has a zero vector
and a universal matrix. If it has changed, however, the difference between
the existing alignment and the new alignment in relation to the current
alignment is added and saved.
The calculation and saving of the base alignment when opening the win-
dow is only carried out in the case where the Load alignment for
secondary reference function is activated.
4 Tick the Accept local alignment from the CAD model check
box.
5 Move the mouse over the CAD model in the CAD window.
Every time you move over a local alignment in the CAD model, the
name, the offset and the rotation are displayed at the position in the
CAD window.
6 Click with the mouse to transfer the desired alignment to the window.
7 Click twice OK.
NOTICE
If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments. See
➤Adapting a base / start alignment [⇨ 3‑27].
3D Best Fit
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for workpieces for
which no clear references have been defined. This is a situation frequently
encountered in free form measurements.
The 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between any
number of points or geometric elements and their specified geometry.
If you select the Best fit on CAD model option, the actual points are
first aligned with the nominal points (according to Gauss) and the per-
pendicular base points of the actual points aligned in this way are then
calculated on the CAD model. Finally, the actual points are aligned with
the perpendicular base points (according to Gauss).
RPS Method
CALYPSO supports two RPS methods: RPS 321 and RPS Freeform.
RPS 321
The RPS 321 method is not suitable for free form measurements. RPS is
short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the 3-2-1
rule.
Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the points that are
specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly user-definable.
One of the advantages is therefore that different results obtained with a
given workpiece are comparable because they are all based on the same
system of coordinates.
RPS Freeform
Contrary to the RPS 321 method, the RPS Freeform method is suitable for
free form measurements. It uses the same algorithms as the HOLOS pro-
gram and is primarily used for measuring body panels for motor vehicles.
The RPS Freeform method has the same function as the 3D best fit ac-
cording to nominal planes. The main planes of the coordinate system
which was selected in the RPS alignment represent the nominal planes.
If more than one direction is defined for a feature, the same feature is
called several times in each direction.
Best fit according to The normal 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible iterative
nominal plane fit between the actual points and the nominal points.
For the “Best fit according to nominal plane”, the actual points are first
projected onto the nominal plane. The nominal plane is defined via the
nominal point and the normal. Then the best possible fit between the
actual points and the nominal points takes place. The perpendicular base
points are recalculated with each iteration step.
P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of tubes.
Select also the type of alignment for the RPS alignment: RPS 321 or
RPS Freeform.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that you
must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of free-
dom.
2 Click Select Features to define the features you want to use for
alignment.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Select the features you need for alignment (multiple selection with the
Ctrl key).
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition template
for alignment.
4 If you have to define reference features in addition to those already
listed:
• Click the line of the feature for which you want to define a refer-
ence.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
• Click Select References.
• In the selection window, click the feature you want to define as a
reference.
• Click OK.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of align-
ment, define the nominal position in the columns headed Nominal
X, Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction indi-
cated in the drawing for each feature you selected (X, Y or Z check
box).
7 If (during alignment with 3D best fit) you want to perform the best fit
on the CAD model, tick the Best fit on CAD model check box.
Rotary Table
OK Reset
The position and the use of the rotary table for the measurement plan
can be determined in this and in other windows. The necessary prereq-
uisites are described in the following sections of the chapter Rotary table:
– ➤Logging in the rotary table [⇨ 12‑7]
– ➤Positioning the rotary table manually [⇨ 12‑35]
– ➤Qualifying the rotary table axis [⇨ 12‑15]
Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure to do
so may result in collisions with the part.
Prerequisites The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:
– All styli of the current stylus system must be qualified. See ➤Qualify-
ing styli manually [⇨ 11‑34]
– The size of the probe must be defined in the default settings under
Extras ® Settings ® CMM (on the Probe index card).
Method There are various methods for defining the clearance planes:
– You can define the ➤corners of the cube with the CMM [⇨ 3‑57].
– You can type in the ➤X, Y and Z locations of the corners manual-
ly [⇨ 3‑58].
– If you do not have a CMM position (or I-POS) button on your CMM
control console (which allows you to record the current position of
the stylus), then you can use the ➤CMM to probe the outside edges
of the part itself as its clearance planes [⇨ 3‑59].
– If you use a CAD model, you can ➤generate the clearance planes
automatically [⇨ 3‑60]. All you have to do is tell CALYPSO how far
you want the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
These methods are described in the following sections.
Block Edges Blocking edges is a way of further restricting stylus travel without the need
to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful, for example,
if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the table or the design
of the clamping device is such that it could cause a collision at an edge.
The new route is calculated automatically. See ➤Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [⇨ 3‑61].
(1)
(2)
4 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
5 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece (posi-
tion 2).
6 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
7 Click OK.
The “Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features?” mes-
sage is displayed.
8 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clear-
ance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
4 Click OK.
The “Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features?” mes-
sage is displayed.
5 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clear-
ance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the work-
piece.
In order to avoid the risk of damaging a stylus, you should set a clearance
distance of at least 10 mm (see ➤Moving the approach position closer to
the feature [⇨ 6‑72]).
(1)
z y
(2)
x
The procedure is the same as in step 3, but you probe in the opposite
direction.
5 Click OK.
The “Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features?” mes-
sage is displayed.
6 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clear-
ance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
NOTICE
Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on the
geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach each
plane directly).
Note: The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are al-
ways blocked. The -Y or +Y edge is also blocked if the measuring ma-
chine is of the horizontal-arm type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Tick the check boxes for the edges you want to block.
3 Click OK.
The edges you selected are blocked with immediate effect.
Stylus System
Units
Set To
Manual Point Masking Activate point masking after time interval
Circle
Circle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
Circle
OK Cancel Help
Tabular editor For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see ➤Working with the tabular editor [⇨ 6‑11]
and Measurement plan editor features in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.
Tolerance Mode
Show formulas Set To
Units
Type Value
Characteristics (Evaluation Settings) X
Characteristics (Nominal Data) Y
Z-value1 Z
Angle One 1 W1
Angle Two 1 W2
Angle of lnclination1 TiltAng
Angle of Rotation1 RotAng
Diameter1 D
Diameter Two1 D2
Radius1 R
Radius Two1 R2
Width1 Width
Length1 Length
OK Cancel Help
Tabular editor For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see ➤Working with the tabular editor [⇨ 6‑11]
and Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog ref-
erence in the Online Help.
Temperature compensation
Purpose of temperature compensation
You can configure CALYPSO to consider the temperature-related expan-
sion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM
when taking the measurements. Additionally, you may establish temper-
ature limits that trigger a warning when going above or below the limits
at the start of the CNC run.
Temperature compensation is of great significance for precision of the
measurements, since the nominal values are generally based on a work-
piece and ambient temperature of 20°C, and the different materials ex-
pand/contract to different degrees as the temperature varies.
Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in accord-
ance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be brought to
the reference temperature.
– CALYPSO receives the information about the temperature, depending
on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales or temperature
sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a temperature probe,
from a file or by simply manually entering the temperature value.
– In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of expansion.
The following table shows the coefficients of expansion of certain
common materials:
NOTICE
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values may
vary slightly from one table to another.
Thermal plate bending Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a CMM
can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision CMMs, the
thermal plate bending effect is also compensated.
The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is
automatically activated as soon as CALYPSO calculates the temperature
compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be simulated
by a beam model.
4 If the temperature stylus has not yet been qualified: qualify it now by
probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a rough, not a highly pre-
cise qualification of the stylus (➤Qualifying the styli [⇨ 11‑25]). To
do this, select the Manual mode and, under Geometry, the Tem-
perature stylus option.
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature stylus.
In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects con-
tact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the measuring
force.
After the first probing, an entry called “Temperature probing” will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point will
be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the “Temperature probing” feature. You can edit
the data (➤Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [⇨ 3‑71]).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in the
Temperature Compensation window.
7 Press OK to confirm.
CALYPSO calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation win-
dow. This value will then be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature com-
pensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be
included in the default printout.
NOTICE
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the “Tem-
perature probing” feature that is entered under Feature in the Tem-
perature Compensation window.
Temperature probing At the start of the CNC run, the temperature probing is conducted au-
during a CNC start tomatically in accordance with the selected feature. CALYPSO calculates
the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in
the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be
used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature
sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
Warnings when temper- If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the workpiece tem-
ature limits are exceeded perature limits have been exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly
before the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or to continue the
run.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the difference between
the qualification temperature and the current stylus temperature is ex-
ceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly before the run begins. You
may decide either to cancel or to continue the run.
Printout All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be in-
cluded in the default printout.
// DEFAULT DIALOG
//TEMP_VALUE=inquireNumber("Workpiece Temp. =")
// or
// LOAD FILE
ALIST=readListFile("wp_temp_value.txt")
// Access to the 1st value of the list parameter
TEMP_STRING=getParameterNamed(ALIST,1)
// Conversion of string to number
TEMP_VALUE=val(TEMP_STRING)
//
// DEFAULT OF TEMP. VALUE
setWPTemperature(TEMP_VALUE)
If the workpiece and the clamping are tightly screwed together at more
than one point, tensions and deformations may be caused in the workpiece
in the event of larger temperature differences. Measuring errors resulting
from these deformations cannot be compensated by CALYPSO.
The two-step temperature compensation corrects positions of elements on
the workpiece, based on the zero point of the base alignment. Distances
between elements consisting of different materials cannot be corrected by
CALYPSO.
Chronological order CALYPSO performs the measurements and computations for the tem-
perature compensation at the beginning of the CNC run. Any tempera-
ture variations of the workpiece and clamping occurring during the CNC
run will not be considered. This is particularly important if you wish to
measure additional elements manually after the CNC run.
Redefining the base When redefining the base alignment, the position of the part reference
alignment point will not be recomputed automatically. You must change the part
reference point yourself after you have redefined the zero point of the
base alignment.
Printouts Temperature compensation switching is indicated in the default printout.
The temperature compensation of the workpiece or base alignment is
highlighted by means of the comment “workpiece” or “base alignment”
in the temperature and correction value specifications.
Defining features
.................................................................................................................
Defining features
Options for defining features
What is a feature? A feature is an element that is to be measured by the CMM. Features
contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose of evaluat-
ing the size, shape and position. The features are assigned to the associ-
ated characteristics.
NOTICE
The various methods for defining features in general are listed below.
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in ➤Details on definition of the fea-
tures [⇨ 4‑41].
Defining features There are the following ways of defining a feature:
– ➤Defining features using automatic feature recognition [⇨ 4‑14]
Probe the feature with the CMM. The automatic feature recognition
will recognize the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the
appropriate definition template.
This procedure is recommended in most cases.
If necessary, you can deactivate the automatic feature recognition for
each feature type (➤Defining the automatic feature recogni-
tion [⇨ 4‑13]).
– ➤Defining features using definition templates [⇨ 4‑7]
Enter a feature into the measurement plan and fill the definition tem-
plate.
This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a meas-
urement plan or if programming is to be effected away from the ma-
chine.
You only need to define frequently occurring similar features once
when using the “Keep Position” function.
– ➤Deriving features from CAD files [⇨ 4‑15]
Load an existing CAD model and extract its features into your meas-
urement plan.
This possibility is useful if you want to program away from the ma-
chine.
– You have the option of defining a constructed or “theoretical feature”
that cannot be probed by the CMM.
A feature of this kind consists of features that have already been de-
fined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see ➤Linking features in
constructions [⇨ 4‑98]).
Importing features The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing
features:
NOTICE
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in ➤Details on definition of the fea-
tures [⇨ 4‑41].
Special measurement In addition to the actual features, you can include special measurement
plan features plan features in the list of features:
– Branch to GEAR PRO (➤Holos and Gear additional fea-
tures [⇨ 4‑82])
– HOLOS macros (➤Holos and Gear additional features [⇨ 4‑82])
– XML files for Blade (➤Turbine Blade additional feature [⇨ 4‑84])
– Measurement plan macros (➤Using macros in the measurement
plan [⇨ 6‑50])
Strategy defaults
Select Resources ® Save / Load Defaults to preset strategy details
on the Strategy index card.
– Measuring method
– Point density
– Point masking
– SCAN limits
– Definitions of the nominals and tolerances
– Start angle
– Form datum
– MMC/LMC mode
– VAST Navigator
– Manual run
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under System
Set Up (Measurement Methods).
The CNC-Start button in the action bar of the index card makes it pos-
sible to open the Start Measurement window and to start the CNC
run.
Icon Meaning
Light gray: The feature has not yet been defined fully.
Dark gray: The feature has been defined fully but has not yet been
measured.
Green: The feature has been defined and measured results have been
gathered.
– ➤Geometry type (only for the circle, cylinder and cone fea-
tures) [⇨ 4‑48]
– ➤Projection type / relative measurement [⇨ 4‑26]
– ➤Evaluation parameters [⇨ 4‑39]
– ➤Clearance groups [⇨ 6‑65]
– ➤Nominal value definition type [⇨ 4‑2]
– Reference coordinate system
– Characteristics and their nominal values, actual values and tolerances
You will find more information under Definition template (Feature) in the
CALYPSO Online Help.
The definition template is shown in the Features window. This illustra-
tion shows the definition template for the “Circle” feature.
Features
Circle 1
A1 Y/Z
A2 Y/Z
Space Axis Z
Length
Start angle
Angle Segment
OK Reset
You do not open the window for formula input in the usual way via the
context menu, but instead by selecting the "Formula" entry in the menu
of the input field. After input of the formula, the background of the input
field will be highlighted in yellow. The value of the parameter will be
computed and displayed if possible. To cancel the entered formula, select
the Input field entry.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.
Duplicating features
If features and groups of features of the same form and configuration
exist several times on your workpiece, you do not need to define each
individual feature.
When using the “Keep Position” function, you define a feature occurring
several times only once, duplicate it and reposition it.
Playing a video To play a video about duplication of features using Keep position
function, click 4_8Update_Movie27_d.htm.
If you assign a new alignment to a feature, the nominal values change as
the feature has different coordinates in the new alignment.
Z Z
Z Z
X X
Y X Y X
Y Y
“Keep Position” By assigning a new alignment to a feature and ticking the Keep Posi-
tion box, the nominal values do not change, i.e. the feature is transferred
to the new alignment.
Z Z
Z Z X
X
Y X Y X
Y Y
other. Use the RETURN key of the control console to close the automatically
detected features. The desired coordinate system is already entered in the
feature.
Defining preassignments
1 Select Resources ® Preassignment for New Features.
- or -
Select CAD ® Preassignment for New Features.
NOTICE
The preassignments are only effective as long as the Preassignment
for New Features window is open.
As soon as you close the window, the “Base Alignment” and “No Work-
ing Plane” default settings will apply again.
NOTICE
New coordinate systems which are inserted into the measurement plan
always refer to the base alignment even if the preassignment window is
open.
Preassignment of projec- The preassignment of the projection plane applies to the following fea-
tion planes tures: point, circle, 2D line, ellipse, slot and rectangle. The preassignment
will only be made if it is possible and useful.
NOTICE
The type of projection “Projection to nominal” is only valid for the “Cir-
cle” feature. If “Projection to nominal” is set in the preassignment, then
no projection plane will be entered for newly created features that are
not a circle.
Settings In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used (➤Defining the automatic feature rec-
ognition [⇨ 4‑13]).
You can exclude error codes or define only certain features, for example,
in optical measurements of bores where bores are just to be identified as
circles.
Procedure If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric ele-
ment on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see ➤Defining features
using automatic feature recognition [⇨ 4‑14]).
The definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see ➤Definition template for features [⇨ 4‑5]).
Procedure During probing, CALYPSO must know the feature you want to measure.
Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan, then open the
definition template and take probings.
The CMM will stop the measurements automatically when the specified
number of measuring points for a particular feature have been taken.
3 Untick the check box for each feature that you want to exclude from
the automatic feature recognition.
4 Press OK to confirm.
NOTICE
By default, this possibility only exists for ACIS files with the “.sat” file
name extension. You must purchase the corresponding options for all
other file types.
Prerequisite The CAD file must have one of the following file name extensions:
NOTICE
When you load an “.asm” file, the individual parts must also be in the
same directory. CALYPSO assembles the individual parts automatically to
form a CAD model.
With CAD files of the following programs, CALYPSO allows you to trans-
fer also the dimension, form and position data together with the features
to the measurement plan:
NOTICE
The structure of the CAD data determines whether CALYPSO can transfer
the dimension, form and position data to the measurement plan. Manual
changes may especially be required for constructions.
Procedure Perform the following steps:
– ➤Convert CAD files in the background [⇨ 4‑17] (optional)
– ➤Loading CAD files [⇨ 4‑17]
– ➤Define the parameters of the global measurement strat-
egy [⇨ 4‑18] (optional)
– ➤Extract features [⇨ 4‑19]
Or
– ➤Extract features and characteristics [⇨ 5‑5]
NOTICE
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. in IGES, VDA or DXF format), you will
have to define the third coordinate manually – either by entering an offset
in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by changing
the nominal geometry.
NOTICE
(Only for CALYPSO older than version 3.8:) If you have a ProE or Unigra-
phics license, you are not permitted to change the host name and server
code of the computer, as otherwise your license becomes invalid. If the
license is lost, the interface no longer functions.
NOTICE
The background conversion may impair the performance of other appli-
cations.
3 Tick the check box of the desired feature and click Settings.
The strategy dialog box opens:
4 Double-click the list entry for which you want to make strategy set-
tings.
The definition dialog box opens.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
As soon as you extract a solid geometry from the CAD model or extract
a feature via the filter (using CAD ® Filter ® ...), CALYPSO assigns the
predefined strategies to these features.
2 Select Edit ® Select All or highlight the individual features you want
to insert into your measurement plan.
Note: CALYPSO assigns the stylus currently activated on the control
console or via the CAD window to all features.
3 Click Apply.
The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete.
4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking OK.
You can edit the individual features in the usual way.
Keep in mind:
You must define the probing points with the CMM or the CAD window
if there are none defined in the strategy list of the feature. You will find
more information in the Online Help under ➤Defining probing points in
the CAD window [⇨ 2‑44].
CALYPSO assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign a
more suitable stylus for some features, i.e. one with which the CMM can
probe the features in question (see ➤Editing a measurement
plan [⇨ 6‑8]).
• Click a point on the line you want to define and use the mouse to
drag the line.
6 To define a rectangle:
• Select the Define Rectangle icon.
• Click a point of the rectangle you want to define.
7 To define two mutually opposite space points:
• Select the Distance check icon.
• Click a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are shown
at the selected position. With the aid of these two points, you can
check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in ques-
tion.
8 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
• Select the Extract Features icon.
• Click the desired feature in the CAD model.
Pattern types
If a feature exists on a workpiece more than once in a regular pattern,
the feature can be defined once and “multiplied” by means of a pattern.
NOTICE
Patterns are not permitted for the following features:
General curve, general surface, free form surface, curve, 3D curve, all
constructions
Pattern procedure CALYPSO supports regular and free pattern types. The available regular
pattern types are linear and circular patterns:
With free patterns, the additional positions of the feature can be freely
defined. To do so, complete a position list in CALYPSO.
Pattern types If you require a certain pattern type not only on one individual feature,
define this pattern type with its parameters and save it.
You can use this pattern type for other features.
NOTICE
If you edit a pattern type, all patterns that are based on this type will also
be changed.
Switching a pattern on If a pattern is defined, switch it on and off again via the Measurement
and off Plan Editor Features.
NOTICE
If you select a pattern for a coordinate system which depends on the
pattern, a warning message appears.
Keeping position Similar to the definition of features, you can use the “Keep Position”
function. When you change the alignment while the Keep Position
check box is active, the pattern including the center, projection plane and
direction of rotation will be moved to the same position, relative to the
new alignment, as that in the old alignment.
Formulas in patterns
You can also use formulas in features that are multiplied by means of a
pattern: for example in the case of a circle for the determination of the
center. When using formulas in a pattern, different procedures for the
determination of the pattern features are possible:
Algorithm Meaning
First formula then pattern When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates the
(general default) value of the formula, uses this value to determine the definition of
the feature and uses then the entered pattern for this feature.
First pattern then formula When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates for
(default for getActual and each individual pattern feature the formulas and enters them in the
LOOP in formulas) pattern features.
Default setting CALYPSO automatically sets one of the two algorithms when defining
the pattern in the Selection (Pattern) window:
You can apply this presetting or change it. CALYPSO recognizes if you
make entries which are relevant for the calculation method, e.g. when
inserting a formula. CALYPSO then generates the current setting and
permits a modification.
Defining a pattern
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
3 To use a new pattern, click New, select the desired pattern type and
click OK. Enter the parameters in the corresponding window.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Pat-
terns and Pattern with position list.
By using a pattern, this will be entered automatically in the list of pat-
terns with the name “Patternx” (x = 1, 2, ...). You can rename the
feature via the context menu.
4 To use an existing pattern type, click Selection of Pattern, select
the desired pattern type and click OK.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Pat-
terns and Pattern with position list.
5 Click Edit to change the pattern type settings.
You will be informed if formulas were used in the feature and the
selection does not comply with your default setting.
Relative measurement
– Edge measurement
A point of an edge or the run of a circular bore in a surface is to be
determined. However, an edge cannot be probed correctly with a
stylus. Instead, CALYPSO measures, for example, auxiliary points on
a working plane and calculates the edge location.
– Offset
The features to be measured are all equally offset from the nominal
position. The actual position of a feature can be determined. Enter
the determined deviation, as a result of which the features will be
measured offset by this vector.
– Missing bore
Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the work-
piece. By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings
and collisions.
In general:
NOTICE
Usually, the working plane is determined by means of a measured plane.
NOTICE
You do not require an additional “working plane” feature for these
methods and you will have the result faster. Disadvantage: These meth-
ods are not as accurate as the “working plane” method.
Edge measurement The Edge Measurement method enables the measurement of an individ-
ual edge point via auxiliary points. Define the distances between the aux-
iliary points and the edge point to be measured. It is possible to easily
move the edge point to be measured by means of a formula or a loop;
the auxiliary points are always at the correct position.
d2
d1
d3
Probing points
d2
Here you must also enter the location parameters for the auxiliary points.
The actual value of the plane is determined by means of three or more
auxiliary points which lie at regular angle distances on an arc around the
circle to be measured.
The radius offset defines the difference between the radius of the points
and the radius of the circle to be measured. The distance d1 is the meas-
uring depth of the circle to be measured counter to the normal vector of
the working plane. The height in which the actual value for the evaluation
is used is determined by the distance d3.
d2
d1
d3
CAD support
You can define an edge point via the CAD window:
Select the Define Edge Point icon in the Switch to Feature
Menu selection list. Each time you click the CAD model, CALYPSO cre-
ates an edge point on the edge located closest to the selected point.
Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of
the new feature.
Nominal
position of
the circle
Offset
(Start height) Projection
to nominal
Measured
points
NOTICE
The “Projection to nominal” function is only available for the “Circle”
feature.
Rotational projection
For certain measuring jobs, the projection of the measured actual points
along a cylinder surface is useful. This projection method requires the
definition of a projection plane and a rotation axis.
The rotational projection produces enhanced form results for circles
measured on a torus or sphere and for 2d lines measured on the surface
NOTICE
The rotational projection cannot be preassigned for new features under
Resources ® Preassignment for New Features.
You can easily determine the actual position of the larger circle but not
the actual positions of the smaller circles (risk of collision!). In this case,
you measure with measuring reference and specify the larger circle as
reference feature. CALYPSO probes the features – offset by the deviation
determined on the larger circle.
Two methods The following methods can be selected:
– Element
CALYPSO determines the actual position of the selected feature. The
difference vector between the actual and nominal value represents
the offset.
– Main orientation
You enter the offset in the coordinate axes of the base alignment.
Select a reference feature as offset for each coordinate axis.
– Own Geometry
CALYPSO determines the offset during a separate search run for
which you indicate a search distance and a measuring height.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
Search path
The search distance is not important for inside features. The search
run starts in the center of the nominal position and is carried out in
all four directions.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
NOTICE
After the search run, CALYPSO knows the actual position of the feature
and carries out the actual measurement on the shifted position with cor-
respondingly large deviations of the position. The nominal data of the
feature are not affected.
Clearance distance
1st probing
Material if bore is
missing, hollow space if
bore exists
NOTICE
To ensure that the function provides the required protection against col-
lisions, the first intermediate position of the feature must lie outside the
material.
– If the CMM does not reach any material during the search process,
the measurement of the bore is continued in the usual way.
– If the CMM reaches material during the search process, the current
feature is omitted. The CMM moves back to the 1st CMM POS of the
feature and from there to the next feature.
NOTICE
This is only possible as long as no intermediate position is programmed
for reaching the next feature.
CALYPSO can only compensate missing bores correctly if the travel paths
between the features and within the features are independent of each
other.
– CALYPSO recognizes whether the feature to be measured is required
for the measurement plan.
– If the required measurement plan information is missing because
the measurement has not been executed, CALYPSO stops the
measuring run. The stylus system is removed from the clearance
planes and the user may remove the workpiece from the clamping
device.
– In all other cases, the measurement is resumed. Information about
the features which have not been measured is shown on the
screen and in the printout.
NOTICE
Observe that missing measured values may cause the output of incom-
plete plot images. Position deviations may be caused.
PCM commands
The “Bore Missing” function can also be activated via the setMissing-
Bore PCM command. Thus, the function and the search distance are par-
ameterized. The PCM function overwrites the corresponding setting for
the feature.
The getActual("feature_name").boreIsMissing command supplies a
Boolean value.
– true: the bore is missing
– false: the bore is not missing.
– Clearance distance
– Retract distance
– Pattern
– RT position
– Parameters: Presettings
– Parameters: Postsettings
You can copy the following properties exclusively to similar features:
– Projection plane (if defined)
– Evaluation settings
– Measurement strategy (measured features only)
– Characteristics
Features are referred to as similar features if they are of the same type
(e.g. circle, cylinder) and their nominal values have been defined in the
same way (e.g. via recall).
Correction of stylus radi- The measured value sent to the CMM is always the center coordinates of
us the stylus. The measured value, therefore, differs from the contact point
- the measured value you want - by the radius of the stylus.
probing
direction
measured
value
probing
radius
desired
measured value
CALYPSO corrects the measured values, so you always receive the coor-
dinates of the contact point. However, there may be a residual error, but
you can usually prevent this.
Tolerance For ... In the Tolerance For: group, you enter a tolerance for the correspond-
ing nominal value. CALYPSO adds a characteristic to the measurement
plan that checks the tolerance.
Selecting the references If you tick the A (for angle) check box, you can freely select the reference
of the angles axis and the orientation for specification of the angle.
With the Reference to Projection angle icon, you select one of the
six axes of the coordinate system as reference axis for the projected an-
gles. The space axis of the feature is changed automatically.
NOTICE
The direction and orientation of the feature does not change.
Selecting a space axis By selecting another axis in the Space Axis field, the reference of the
projected angles is changed but not their values. Therefore, the reference
axis of the feature and thus its direction and orientation are changed.
Reversing a space axis By reversing the space axis, the direction and orientation of the feature
are also changed.
Click the Mirrors geometry and strategy icon. The whole feature
including the strategies at the coordinate plane that is perpendicular to
the set space axis is mirrored.
Selecting the angle for- The angle symbols indicate the axis and orientation of the start angle and
mat other angles.
To change the type of representation of the angle, click the angle symbol
and select the desired orientation.
Default features
Menu: Features
Feature Description
Point ➤Point feature [⇨ 4‑45]
Special geometries
Menu: Features ® Special Geometries
Feature Description
Ellipse ➤Ellipse special geometry [⇨ 4‑60]
Additional features
Menu: Features ® Additional Features
Feature Description
HOLOS ➤Holos and Gear additional features [⇨ 4‑82]
Point feature
probing direction
measured
value
correction
To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector di-
rections which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is possible to
switch to the space point procedure by clicking Evaluation in the def-
inition template. In case of an unknown normal vector direction, the cor-
rection will be automatically defined.
Evaluation Use the Evaluation button to enter details relating to the conversion
and correction of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode, you
can now select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:
The corrections that are made for the respective point type are shown in
the diagram.
Probe direction
z
Nominal contour
Nominal
Actual normal
normal
4
3 Actual contour
5
Nominal point
1 2 x
1 Touch Point
6 2 Plane-Point
3 Space Point
4 Net Point
5 Midpoint
6 CAD Face Point
NOTICE
The contact point on the surface must always be entered as the nominal
position for a point, regardless of the desired Space Point Mode.
Working Plane By selecting a working plane under Projection and entering a value for
the d3 distance, Space Point is automatically set for the Space Point
Mode.
Measurement of Normal Normal measurement (CNC and Manual) is not possible for the CAD sur-
face point. As for the touch point and the center point, the button is not
visible in the definition template.
numbers for the maximum and minimum deviation are output accord-
ingly. If only one probing point is used for the calculation, no form is
possible.
NOTICE
Note that the coordinates corrected by the stylus radius are used for the
calculation.
Special aspects of 3D If only point features are used for the 3D best fit, the features are fitted
best fit according to the nominal plane. Usually, the plane normal according to
which the fit is to be carried out is taken from the nominal geometry. The
plane normal of a CAD surface point is determined via the perpendicular
of the actual coordinate on the CAD model. The nominal point for the
best fit represents the perpendicular base point of the actual point on the
CAD model in the base alignment.
Best fit on CAD model By activating Best fit on CAD model, an iterative method is used to
fit all features in a CAD model. The feature reference points of the actual
geometries are fitted. In the case of the CAD surface point, the probing
center points of all valid and determined points and their stylus radii are
made available for the calculation. If only CAD surface points are used for
the 3D best fit (and best fit on CAD model is selected), the result is iden-
tical to the result of a free form surface. However, you cannot select a
coordinate system for the 3D best fit.
Circle feature
Menu: Features ® Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle A and the partial angle PA (for an arc) are specified in the
definition template.
Menu: Features ® Four-Point Circle Macro
NOTICE
If a different strategy for the circle has been set in the presettings, this
strategy will be added and not the four-point circle macro.
Probing strategy Probe at least 3 points. The probing points should be on a section per-
pendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is advisable to
probe at least 4 points.
Automatic feature rec- Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
ognition height. If the height differences between the individual points are exces-
sive, CALYPSO will compute a cylinder. You can reconstruct a circle man-
ually in the Geometry menu.
Local feature alignment The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Gage Correction Qualifi- Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the
cation dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during meas-
urement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.
Plane feature
Menu: Features ® Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the po-
sition or inclination of which you want to determine.
CALYPSO computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template, the computed length and width of the plane are dis-
played along with the coordinates of the probing points.
Probing strategy Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as possible
over the plane.
Automatic feature rec- If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), CALYPSO will
ognition compute a line. You can reconstruct a plane manually in the Geome-
try menu.
Result output This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
Local feature alignment The origin of the local feature alignment depends on the position of the
plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:
– Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y, and +Z.
– Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y, and -Z.
The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to 5 planes
of a cube.
2D Line feature
Menu: Features ® 2D Line
The 2D Line feature is for probing lines and straight lines on any plane on
the surface of the workpiece. CALYPSO computes a mean-value line
through the points you probe.
You can restrict the degrees of freedom in X, Y and Z as well as with
regard to the normal direction for the determination of the mean-value
line.
Types of display The 2D line can be defined and represented in two different ways:
– with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,
– with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the pro-
jected angles A1 and A2.
You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resour-
ces ® Features representation.
Probing strategy Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however).
Automatic feature rec- Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise, CA-
ognition LYPSO will compute a plane. You can open the Geometry menu and
regenerate the feature as a line.
Local feature alignment The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is at the first point on
the line which defines the line fully when first registered – in these ex-
amples points 1, 4 and point 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6
or
6 5 1 2 3 4
or
3 1 2 4 5
Strategies You measure a 2D line using the “Line” strategy. You can enter any start
point on the line and the length of the path here.
If the line runs over recesses on the workpiece and thus cannot be meas-
ured in one pass, you can define several “Line” strategies in the strategy.
Enter a negative length to reverse the measuring direction.
Result output After measurement, the following results are output in the definition
template and in the printout.
Result Meaning
X, Y, Z Coordinates of the origin of the local feature
alignment
A1 (Z/X) Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the
X/Z plane; the reference axis is X.
– In the printout, the projected angles are ref-
erenced to the position of the feature.
– In the definition template, the projected an-
gles are referenced to the position of the fea-
ture's plane normal (the 2D line corresponds
to a reduced plane).
A2 (Y/X) Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the
X/Y plane; the reference axis is X.
– In the printout, the projected angles are ref-
erenced to the position of the feature.
– In the definition template, the projected an-
gles are referenced to the position of the fea-
ture's plane normal.
Sigma Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed fea-
ture
Result Meaning
Min/Max Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to
the best-fit computed feature
Form Difference between minimum and maximum de-
viation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
spatial view
Z
Y A1
X
A2=0
X
3D Line feature
Menu: Features ® 3D Line
A 3D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least two
features. You can, for example, employ a 3D line to represent the axis of
a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of definition.
Open the Nominal Definition selection list and select Recall and the
desired features.
The resulting 3D line is placed through the center point of the selected
features.
Cylinder feature
Menu: Features ® Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts.
spatial view
Z
X
Y A1
example cylinder
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
A2
Local feature alignment The origin of the local feature alignment is on the plane with the lowest
probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Gage Correction Qualifi- Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the
cation dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during meas-
urement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.
Cone feature
Menu: Features ® Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and
outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone's taper angle.
The cone has the following defining aspects:
– Position of the X, Y, Z circle center points
– Diameter of the D circle
– Position and orientation of the A1, A2 cone axes
– Cone's taper angle AC
Probing strategy Probe at least 6 points:
1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the
cone.
2 Move the CMM to another height.
3 Measure three points at this height.
4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3.
CALYPSO computes the data of the cone from the circular sections at
the different heights. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendic-
ularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
Automatic feature rec- If cone angle AC is very small, CALYPSO computes a cylinder instead of a
ognition cone. The measuring uncertainty for the cone axis will be too high if the
height difference between the circular sections is very small, and CALYP-
SO computes a circle instead of a cone.
You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.
Strategies Circle, intersection and screw line measurements as well as surface lines
are available as strategies.
Result output This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
spatial view X
Z A1
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
example cone
A2
Local feature alignment The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the circle of
smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the smaller toward the
larger circle.
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the def-
inition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
Measuring speed For the “helix” strategy, you can select between the “Standard” (scan-
ning according to nominal data) and “Fast” measuring methods. Select
the “Fast” method only if measuring times have been predefined and you
are sure that the stylus does not loose contact with the material.
Sphere feature
Menu: Features ® Sphere
Use the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the center coordi-
nates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
Probing strategy Probe at least 4 points distributed as evenly as possible over the surface
of the sphere. If the stylus system and sphere position allow this, it is best
to probe from different directions. The first two points should be probed
near the sphere's pole and the remaining points along the equator of the
sphere.
Automatic feature rec- If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, CALYPSO
ognition will not automatically recognize a sphere. In this case, you can reconstruct
a sphere manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter of
the sphere.
Curve feature
Menu: Features ® Curve
Use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies and lift curves
(planar curves on the surface of a cylinder). This feature is extremely ver-
satile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section (see in the
operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option un-
der Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
3D Curve feature
Menu: Features ® 3D Curve
Use the 3D Curve feature to measure free form surfaces. This feature is
extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section
(see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software
option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
D Dlarge
D2 M (X, Y, Z) Dsmall
(X1, Y1, Z1) (X2, Y2, Z2)
Local feature alignment The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the ellipse. It
is not projected onto a plane of the coordinate system.
NOTICE
If there are several points on a segment, make sure that they are distrib-
uted as evenly as possible.
How to distribute the probing points according to the first strategy:
2 1
3 5
1 5
2
3 4
Rectangular path
The Rectangular Path path generation method allows you to probe the
sides of the cube and evade the corners. You can enter different distances
to the corners for each individual side and for each individual corner.
In the Strategy defaults, you can enter absolute distances, distances
in percent or as a multitude of the stylus radius. In the Rectangular
Path technology window, these specifications are converted into abso-
lute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the nominal
values of the rectangle.
D1
R1
Dimensions and radius CALYPSO can measure a torus only with certain dimensions and radius
ratios ratios. The following radius ratios are possible:
– 0 ≤ R2 ≤ R1
If the main radius is larger than the subsidiary radius, the subsidiary
radius may be as small as necessary. There are no restrictions for the
location of the measuring points.
– 0 < R1 ≤ R2
If the main radius is smaller than or equal to the subsidiary radius, the
main radius may be larger than zero.
– At R1 < R2, the cross section surfaces overlap. No measuring
points may be on the surface of the overlapping zone (lemon).
– At R1 = R2, the cross section surfaces are touching. There are no
restrictions for the location of the measuring points.
Probing strategy To define the nominal geometry:
NOTICE
Make sure that the probing points are distributed as far apart as possible.
P1 P3 P2 P5
P4
R r
X0
3 Check the P4 and P5 points at any radial, but maintain unequal axial
angles relative to the P1, P2 and P3 points.
4 Probe two additional points.
Best-fit method For the torus, the best-fit method according to Gauss can only be used.
Size Characteristics The following size characteristics can be used for the torus:
– X, Y, Z value
– Projected rotation and inclination angle
– Diameter and radius (R1, R2, D1, D2)
– Polar position Radius, Angle, Height
– 2D, 3D Polar Distance, Simple distance (measured from the center of
the torus)
The following form and location characteristics can be used for the torus
(MMC/LMC not possible):
– Form
– True Position
– Coaxiality
– Concentricity
Constructions The Intersection construction is not possible for the torus. The other con-
structions are possible, with the exception of defined constructions.
When defining the position of the Cone Addition, a torus can be used as
reference. However, the main diameter of the torus must be used for the
diameter definition.
Special features You cannot define any strategy default for the torus as the automatic
feature recognition does not function.
Both, the large and the small circle paths cannot be scanned by self-cen-
tering probing.
The torus must also be probed perpendicular to the surface like the sphere
and cone features. The navigation paths from one path to the next path
always run on a curved helix path.
Z0
Xp
X0
Yp
Unlike spheres and cones, the measuring height can be entered as length
as the path is not clearly defined. Therefore, the position of the circle path
is defined by an angle.
The center of the secondary circle (xP, yP, zP) serves as the vertex of the
angle. The start axis (angle = 0) is formed from the center to the outside
0°
The start angle and the angle range are defined at the smaller radius. The
reference axis and the direction of rotation of the angles are the same as
those used for the measuring height definition of the large circle path
(see above).
The measuring height of the small circle path is also defined by an angle.
The angle is referenced to the uv plane or the surface area of the torus.
3 Enter an offset for each point. The points are offset along the probing
direction.
4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
Automatic feature rec- An offset plane is not recognized automatically by CALYPSO.
ognition
3 Probe the other points either on this side or the other side.
4 Close the definition template.
Display in CAD window Only the center plane is displayed in the CAD window for the symmetry
plane. The side planes remain hidden.
Result output CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the symmetrical plane and dis-
plays the distance between the two initial planes.
Characteristics By activating Distance in the definition template, CALYPSO adds a “Dis-
tance_Symmetry” characteristic to the measurement plan.
Feature recognition Automatic feature recognition is not available for symmetry planes.
Automatic Feature End This is where you define the number of probings after which the definition
template is closed automatically. Enter the number in the default settings
under Extras ® Settings ® Measurement on the Features note-
book page.
Restrictions The restrictions X, Y, Z, normal vector and distance are allowed.
Particularities for the in- For the intersection of a symmetry plane with another feature, you can
tersection select whether the symmetry plane or one of the side planes should be
intersected. Activate Wall for the intersection with the side planes.
Table file The “idSymbol” column in the table file shows the keyname “MidPlane”.
The actual distance between the side faces of the symmetry plane is
shown in the “distance” column. The distance from the nominal geom-
etry is shown in the “nom_distance” column.
NOTICE
As of the second step, it is possible to recall other features instead of
cylinders. CALYPSO evaluates the points of these features as points of
cylinders.
Pattern The stepped cylinder can be defined with pattern. If you select Add loop
to all marked Features for a feature with pattern in the context menu
in the Recall Feature Points dialog box, CALYPSO recalls all points of
the feature with pattern in one individual step of the stepped cylinder and
handles them in the same way as points of one individual cylinder.
If you select Delete loop from all selected Features for a feature
with pattern in the context menu in the Recall Feature Points dialog
box, CALYPSO recalls the individual pattern features of the feature as
individual steps of a stepped cylinder with pattern. This is only useful if
the same pattern is used for all steps and you select this option for all
steps. CALYPSO creates as many pattern features as possible in the step-
ped cylinder with pattern: The number of pattern features represents the
minimum number of features of individual pattern for all steps.
Feature reference point Each step has its own feature reference point the nominal position of
and axis which must lie on the axis of the stepped cylinder. The position of the
first step becomes the feature reference point of the stepped cylinder.
The axis of the stepped cylinder is determined by best-fit alignment. The
total length of the stepped cylinder results from the difference between
the highest end point and the lowest start point of the individual steps
on the common axis.
NOTICE
In case of subsequent changes of the individual steps, the total length of
the stepped cylinder is not changed any more.
Total length
Measuring plane
Cylinder axis
Automatic feature rec- A sphere point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the fea-
ognition ture in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.
Automatic feature rec- An angle point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the fea-
ognition ture in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then perform
the probing.
Gage Correction Qualifi- Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the
cation dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during meas-
urement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.
Defined Height CALYPSO performs the probings on a circle on cone perpendicular to the
cone surface. If the X/Y position of the actual cone is offset from the
nominal cone, the height of the probing points is no longer equal. An
ellipse is produced. This change increases with the cone's taper angle.
NOTICE
For a new circle on cone, the Defined Height function is deactivated
by default. Otherwise, qualification with automatic feature recognition
would not be possible because CALYPSO takes the height as the value 0
for the automatic feature recognition.
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the def-
inition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and pro-
tocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general surface.
Point from the CAD mod- You can add a nominal point to the general surface by clicking the desired
el position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing You can add a point to the general surface by probing with the CMM.
Automatic feature rec- A general surface is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.
ognition
Special features The General curve feature corresponds to the FEAT/GCURVE DMIS
feature. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed from splines
in the evaluation of a general curve to obtain the result of the nominal-
actual comparison of two curved lines. The General Curve feature is
merely a “container” for a set of points belonging to a curve.
Strategy Each point of a general curve is probed, measured and processed indi-
vidually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strat-
egy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and pro-
tocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general curve.
Point from the CAD mod- You can add a nominal point to the general curve by clicking the desired
el position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing You can add a point to the general curve by probing.
Automatic feature rec- A general curve is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.
ognition
3 Click the feature in the CAD window which you want to transfer as a
free form surface.
The name of the feature saved in the CAD model is displayed in the
uppermost line in the window.
4 Select Free Form Surface to define a free form surface.
5 Define the path generation type.
6 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated under
Settings.
7 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
8 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.
9 Under Points, click Create and check the result by means of the CAD
model.
10Transfer the displayed strategy to the feature by means of Create
Feature or click Delete and repeat the process by starting with step
5.
11Close the window.
Best Fit
Best Fit
Translation Rotation
Alignment
Create Alignment
Calculation
Exact Fast
OK Cancel Apply
Under Best Fit, you can set the best-fit accuracy using the slider or enter
it directly. A higher value leads to a faster end of iteration calculation and
to a less precise result. It is recommended to select a best-fit accuracy
value between 0.000005 and 0.01.
Measurement plan edi- You can also predefine the best-fit accuracy for the entire measurement
tor features plan or for each free form surface in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features under Geometry ® Best fit accuracy (free form sur-
face).
NOTICE
With each iteration step, the A value is calculated from the translational
and rotational parameters of the transformation. This value is compared
with the predefined best-fit accuracy. As soon as the calculated A value
is smaller than the best-fit accuracy, iteration will be stopped.
NOTICE
Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR PRO must have
been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.
Strategy Comment
Makro Call
Selection
OK Reset
Group Entries
Specification file For additional information, please refer to the BLADE PRO document.
Results Output formats of the results.
Shows all “Curve Form” characteristics or curves of the measurement
plan. Select those curves or characteristics the curves of which you
Features want to evaluate with BLADE PRO as turbine blades.
Restriction with respect to Activate Only export features already measured to export
features only features with measured values.
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metroto-
mography option under Measuring in intersection planes.
Use of the additional The Point Set additional feature is used to evaluate points.
feature You have the following options:
– Calculating and representing deviations from the CAD model
– Modifying the representation of the deviations
– Defining features on the point cloud and transferring them to the
measurement plan
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metroto-
mography option under Nominal-actual comparison on a CT dataset.
Origin of the measuring You have several options for the takeover of measuring values:
values – Measuring points on the workpiece
– Recalling measured points via the point recall function
– Reading point file with measuring values
Features
Point Set1
Comment
Number of Points
Filter Apply
Critical Angle
Maximum Distance
Triangulation Apply
Deviation Calculation
Calculate Tolerance
Exact Angle
View
Magnification
Properties...
Graphic Properties...
OK Reset
9
• Plot: The view of the CAD window is shown as a plot.
• Transparency: The CAD model is shown transparently.
• Hide: The CAD model is hidden; only the point set is displayed.
10Click the Save icon to save the actual values of the point set in a TXT
or STL file.
11Click the Save with nominal values icon to save the point set
with nominal values in a TXT or STL file.
CNC 12Click the CNC session file icon to configure the output of a session
file during the CNC run in the Output Settings dialog box.
13Click OK to close the window.
Entries The nominal values of the station point should specify the expected po-
sition of the laser tracker but do not need to be entered.
The actual values of the station point are calculated later and represent
the exact position of the laser tracker.
Selection of the bundle By selecting the Strategy button, the List of Bundle Points window
points is opened.
You enter here the points that are measured from several stations and
are thus suitable for the conversion. You define also whether the station
point is a base station or a follow-on station.
NOTICE
A base station is not absolutely necessary. If no station is a base station,
the calculation takes place via a free net adjustment (“freier Netzaus-
gleich”).
NOTICE
The bend parameters have no effect unless you have installed a measur-
ing probe.
The plug or bore is measured as an overlapping full circle in a separate
measurement plan.
1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or plug.
2 Select Resources ® Utilities ® Gauge Correction Qualifica-
tion.
CALYPSO adds the icon for gage correction qualification to the list of
features.
3 Open the definition template.
4 Enter the qualified diameter of the bore or the plug in the D field.
NOTICE
As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not
available here.
In the measurement plan, constructions are indicated by the letter “T”
next to the icon because these are theoretical features. Apart from Re-
call, CALYPSO supports 15 different constructions.
Overview of constructions
Recall is a special construction. It is called from within the definition tem-
plate of the feature.
You an call all other constructions from within the Construct menu.
CALYPSO offers the following constructions:
Construction Description
Perpendicular ➤Perpendicular construction [⇨ 4‑118]
Construction Description
Edge Point ➤Edge Point construction [⇨ 4‑144]
Defining constructions
The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for de-
fining a feature.
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by se-
lecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click the construction icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
3 Select the features required for the construction using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
• Click Feature and select the feature of your choice from the se-
lection list.
• Enter the name of the feature in the input field and confirm with
.
• Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the input field.
Enter a formula for the name of the feature (Result: Text).
The value of the formula is calculated during run time and the con-
struction defined accordingly.
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
4 Press OK to confirm.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
Certain special aspects have to be borne in mind with the following con-
structions:
Recall construction
The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to derive
a new feature from one or more features.
Example of application Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle on which the center points of the measured circles are
located. To this end, define a new circle from the “recalled” center points
of the four measured circles.
NOTICE
Proceed very carefully when defining a feature by recalling. Theoretically,
you could recall any number of features but this would not make any
sense.
New feature without If the new feature does not yet possess any pattern, the following applies:
pattern – If you select a feature with the “with loop” pattern, the reference
points or the specified points of all pattern features of the feature are
recalled.
– If you select a feature with the “with index transfer” pattern, you are
prompted whether a pattern is to be assigned to the new feature. A
pattern with the minimum actual number of all marked features with
the “with index transfer” pattern is offered as default.
By confirming this, the reference points or the specified points of the
original feature of the patterns are recalled and the proposed pattern
is assigned.
If you reject this, a pattern with only one pattern feature is created.
– If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
New feature with pat- If a pattern has been assigned to the new feature beforehand, the fol-
tern lowing applies:
– If you select a feature with the “with index transfer” pattern, the ref-
erence points or the specified points of the original features are re-
called and the pattern of the new feature is assigned.
– If you select a feature with the “with loop” pattern, the reference
points of all pattern features of the feature or the specified points of
all pattern features of the feature are recalled.
If then the assigned pattern of the new feature contains more actual
pattern features than the minimum of all actual numbers of patterns
(of all marked features), you are prompted whether the pattern with
the smallest actual number is to be used for the feature.
By confirming this, the new feature will receive the corresponding
pattern.
NOTICE
This leads to a stop of the CNC run. Since the number of pattern features
of the newly defined feature is larger than the number of pattern features
of the individual recalled features, some of the pattern features of the
new feature are not defined.
– If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
3 Open in the tree the features with loop to recall individual pattern
features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification of
the index range, e.g. “Circle1(1-4)”.
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
“Circle2*”.
4 If you want to define the recall by means of the formula input, do not
select anything here and select Formula in the context menu. Enter
a formula which will furnish a list of names. To do this, use the list
PCM function.
Example: list("Plane1","Plane2")
Proceed with step 7.
NOTICE
The result is a theoretical feature that accesses the original feature with
the “getActual” formula.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you re-
quire to be created by a recall.
2 If the new feature should posses a certain pattern, select under Nom-
inal Definition the Pattern entry.
3 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall One Feature
entry.
The Selection dialog box with the features is opened.
Only those features are displayed that are of the same type as the
feature to be defined.
4 Open in the tree the features in loops to recall individual pattern fea-
tures.
You can then access individual features of a pattern.
5 Select the corresponding feature and confirm with OK.
The feature is accepted and determines the new feature.
Playing a video To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate system,
click 012_Rueckruf2.htm.
Recalling one feature Once you have accepted a feature with a pattern, the new feature will
and pattern also receive this pattern, regardless of whether you have assigned a pat-
tern to this new feature beforehand or not.
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature and you have ac-
cepted an individual pattern feature, this becomes the original feature of
the assigned pattern.
NOTICE
Use the Recall Feature Points window to define the point recall. The
feature will be recomputed with the respective current actual values
when closing. If this is not necessary since you only want to check entries,
untick the Re-calculate Nominal Geometry check box.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points win-
dow.
At the same time, two new icons appear in the top right corner: Show
selection of Actual points and Select Actual-points via
Mouse cursor.
All the potential features for the point recall are listed in the Recall
Feature Points window.
3 Activate Show all Features in Patterns or Loops to recall indi-
vidual pattern features.
Features “with loop” are shown with brackets and the specification
of the index range, e.g. “Circle1(1-4)”.
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
“Circle2<*>”.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
• Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown “with loop” and with the index range.
• Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown “with index transfer”
(with asterisk).
Base alignment
Box with
recalled points
Coordinate system
2 Click one of the icons to copy a point, an area, a box, a circle path, an
angle range or a cylinder into the feature list.
3 Enter the corresponding parameters in the lower part of the window.
4 Click OK.
The defined points are included in the new feature. In the list of fea-
tures, the ranges appear behind the name of the feature.
Range specification syn- The following syntax applies to the range specification:
tax
Input Meaning
point(1) Point 1
points(1,5) Point 1 to point 5
point(1) point(4) point(5) Points 1, 4 and 5 (entries separated by
blanks)
box(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2),"coord_system", box_distance) All points within a cuboid parallel to the
axis with the corner coordinates in the
defined coordinate system and with the
defined distance to the sides of the cube
path(2) The points of the 2nd circle path
angles(10,90) The points in the angle range from 10° to
90° (only for circle paths)
cylinder(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2,diameter) The points within a cylinder with the cen-
ter of the base area (x1,y1,z1), the center
of the top surface (x2,y2,z2) and the “di-
ameter”.
Selected features are By selecting additional features in the list for “Point recall from file”, these
measured features will be measured first before the files will be loaded.
In this way, it is possible to create the file to be loaded for the point recall
only when the selected features are measured. If you use the PCM Tech-
nology option, you can have PCM files run in the same way. If you use
the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you can export the files di-
rectly (see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
Software option under Output of curve points and tolerances in text files).
If the selected features cannot be measured or if an error occurs during
the measurement, the point recall will not be carried out.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you re-
quire to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points win-
dow.
Line Line
Circle On Plane Circle on Plane
Circle Circle
Helix Helix
Any General path
NOTICE
CALYPSO can only evaluate the points correctly if they are sorted and (in
case of several paths) assigned to the correct path. Otherwise, filtering,
outlier elimination and overlapping may lead to incorrect results.
Format description Example of a file format:
x y z u v w r
TypeOfScanningPath=Circle
1.172944143 0.200792127 2 0 0 1 2
2.346667482 0.404625934 2 0 0 1 2
3.522572338 0.609053019 2 0 0 1 2
4.703111961 0.810897707 2 0 0 1 2
5.889935115 1.023098404 2 0 0 1 2
6.903111961 0.817923879 2 0 0 1 2
7.889935115 1.118267624 2 0 0 1 2
8.603111961 0.893874987 2 0 0 1 2
9.489935115 1.088267824 2 0 0 1 2
9.703111961 0.810895545 2 0 0 1 2
9.989935115 1.036485024 2 0 0 1 2
7.703111961 0.839084757 2 0 0 1 2
TypeOfScanningPath=Any
8.889935115 1.008267624 2 0 0 1 2
8.703111961 0.810897707 2 0 0 1 2
8.889935115 1.008267624 2 0 0 1 2
8.703111961 0.810897707 2 0 0 1 2
8.889935115 1.008267624 2 0 0 1 2
8.703111961 0.810897707 2 0 0 1 2
9.889935115 1.008267624 2 0 0 1 2
9.703111961 0.810897707 2 0 0 1 2
9.889935115 1.008267624 2 0 0 1 2
The x, y and z coordinates are the coordinates of the nominal points; u,
v and w are the coordinates of the normal vector and r is the coordinate
of the stylus radius.
The header and the last four columns can be omitted.
Perpendicular construction
Menu: Construct ® Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, CALYPSO computes the shortest
distance between two features.
Feature 1 With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from which
the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature as Feature 1.
The table below shows which coordinates are used:
Feature 2 With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the per-
pendicular. The perpendicular is vertical on feature 2. Therefore, feature
2 must be a spatially defined element.
Interpretation of results Result of the calculation:
– The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the speci-
fication of two projection angles.
– The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance of
the perpendicular is the distance of the point in feature 1 to feature
2. CALYPSO automatically adds a Length of Perpendicular character-
istic to the measurement plan.
Intersection construction
NOTICE
Stepped cylinders can only be intersected as axes.
NOTICE
Free form surfaces can only be intersected with axes.
– If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you obtain
as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between the two
straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.
– If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
– 2 intersection points
Line
Circle P2
P1
Projection line
CALYPSO computes as the result the piercing point of the straight line
through the plane.
CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the circular line with
the plane.
z, k
Geometry type There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
– Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the intersection element
the circle the center point of which represents the intersection point
of the cylinder axis with the section plane and which intersects the
cylinder vertically.
The plane is “corrected” orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45°.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
– Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical el-
lipse as the profile element.
Geometry type There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
– Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the profile element the
circle the center point of which represents the intersection point of
the axis of the cone with the section plane and which intersects the
cone vertically.
The plane is “corrected” orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45°.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
– Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical el-
lipse - if it exists - as the profile element.
If the angle between the plane and the axis of the cone is not larger
than the cone's taper angle and, therefore, no intersection ellipse ex-
ists, no intersection is calculated.
NOTICE
The ACIS 3D Toolkit program must be open for the intersection calcula-
tion of a free form surface with one axis.
When intersecting a free form surface with an axis, CALYPSO supplies a
3D point. If several intersections are possible (since the free form surface
has for example a wavy profile), only the first determined intersection
point will be output.
The axes of the following features can be intersected with the free form
surface:
– Cylinder (wall intersection not activated)
– Cone (wall intersection not activated)
– Stepped cylinder
– Torus
– 3D line
When defining the intersection, you can specify the free form surface as
first or second feature.
The distance between the actual center point of the sphere and the cyl-
inder axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
The distance between the actual sphere center point and the cone axis
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
R K
Symmetry construction
Examples:
– Symmetry point of two circles
Line 1 Line 2
Symmetry axis 1
Symmetry axis 2
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered be-
tween Feature 1 and Feature 2 (Feature 1 and Feature 2 usually differ at
least slightly in height).
Projection construction
Menu: Construct ® Projection
Tangent construction
Menu: Construct ® Tangent
The Tangent construction offers two options:
– You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tan-
gents connecting the two features. Circle, Circle on Cone, Point and
3D Point are suitable features.
– You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tan-
gential circles with predefined diameter. Two 2D lines or two features
of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone type are suitable
characteristics.
Enter the two features in the definition template and select the desired
result.
The results are shown in the Result Selection group of the definition
template. Select here the result you want to proceed with.
Automatic corrections If the features do not lie exactly in one plane, CALYPSO computes the
corresponding tangents in a projection plane.
– Point and point
Point and point always lie in one plane.
– Circle and circle
The point is projected onto the plane of the circle. If the point does
not lie within the circle, there are always two tangents.
– Circle and circle
Two circles serving as features must lie on parallel planes. Then the
tangents lie on the middle plane which is symmetrical with two
planes. In the case of a height difference of both circles, the height
of the tangents results from the average of the two center points.
R1
R2
Automatic correction CALYPSO computes the tangential circles even if both features do not
intersect each other although this is the mathematical prerequisite for the
existence of the tangential circles.
CALYPSO then computes the tangential circles in relation to the projec-
tions of both lines onto their common symmetry plane.
Selecting the result Use the button in the definition template to select the plane sector in
which the tangential circle should lie.
Interpretation of results CALYPSO computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
largest diameter.
Average-Feature construction
Menu: Construct ® Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you calculate a new feature from
certain averages of several features.
Select existing features Use the Select existing Features button to select the features for
whose measured values you want to compute the average.
Selection list In the selection list, define the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for which
you want the average computed. Values for characteristics that are not
indicated here will be adopted from the first feature in the list.
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection point
of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone center).
– Referenced To: Part Alignment
The coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will be com-
puted. The diameter will be output on the point of the cone axis for
which the coordinate on this axis is equal to L.
– Or at: Feature that (if necessary, via the intersection point with the
cone axis) defines the height of the required diameter. Only the Point,
2D Line and Plane features are suitable.
Position Definition If you have selected the Position Definition option, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required position indi-
rectly using another feature. CALYPSO requires the following entries:
– At D: Diameter for which the height should be calculated.
– Or at: Feature at the height of which the position should be deter-
mined (the height above the cone origin). Only the Circle, Circle on
Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone, Torus and Ellipse features are suitable.
Interpretation of results CALYPSO will either calculate a specific diameter or the coordinates of a
specific height on the cone depending on what you have selected.
Feature You select a 2D or a 3D curve as the feature. The curve must be gothic
or elliptical in shape.
Sphere Sphere
Angle Angle
Gap
Contact points
NOTICE
You cannot change the filter, outlier and evaluation settings in the se-
lection window for the curve. You can change filters and outliers only in
the feature itself.
Diameter You enter the diameter of the circle for the best fit process under Di-
ameter. You can also calculate the diameter with a formula.
Offset in Touch Point The “Offset in Touch Point” allows you to simulate the pressing of the
circle against the curve. The center point of the circle and the contact
points change. The contact between circle and contour is no longer lim-
ited to one point; now, they contact along an arc. CALYPSO then com-
putes the contact point from the center of gravity of this arc.
Circle
Circle with Contour
offset
Contact point
Contact curve
NOTICE
The offset is added to the radius of the fitted circle and not to the diam-
eter.
Wavelength for filter For a better fit, enter a wave separation length (WTL) for filtering the
profile (no filtering if you enter “0”). Filtering can avoid excessive devia-
tions between the determined and actual contact points.
Consideration of the wave separation length differs from the filtering of
measured values otherwise used. It is a special method for the circle in
contour best fit.
Minimum contact angle You can also specify a Minimum contact angle. This can exclude
ambiguities during the best fit process (in case of real, distorted data re-
cords). Contact points that are no further apart than by this angle are
regarded as a single contact point.
If one of the following error messages appears at the bottom of the win-
dow, you can attempt to achieve an unambiguous result by increasing
the minimum contact angle.
– No two-point contact with contact point greater than minimum
angle
– There are several possible positions for the circle with the
contact angle greater than the minimum angle
NOTICE
The minimum contact angle is not taken into consideration if the curve
contains points from measurements performed with different stylus radii.
Result Selection You can choose from different result types and receive a circle or a space
point depending on your selection:
Calculation of the bend For the “Bend Circle” result, a section of the curve is interpolated via
circle radius polynomials of the fourth degree. Therefore, CALYPSO requires for the
calculation the points located on the left and right of the contact point.
You also predefine the determination of these points:
– explicitly by specifying the point numbers
– implicitly by specifying the angle ranges
R2 R1
Even if the best fit has been completed successfully, it is not possible to
calculate the bend circle in the following cases:
Start angle Angle between the first contact point and the
Feature_Angle_Circle in contour best fit reference axis or between the alignment line
and the first contact point.
Angle Range Angle between the contact points. Only circles
Angle_Range_Circle in contour best fit can be used as the features in this case.
Contact angle 1
– Primary errors are errors that prevent results from being calculated.
Examples of these errors include contours with fewer than three
points or an incompletely defined nominal geometry.
– Secondary errors occur if it was not possible to reach a result during
calculation of the best fit due to insufficient input parameters.
Secondary errors are displayed in the error line at the bottom edge of
the window (below the geometry).
This error message is preceded by an indication of whether the error
occurred in the calculation of the nominal geometry or the actual ge-
ometry. If both geometries are faulty, only the error text for the actual
geometry is output and printed in the protocol/printout.
If CALYPSO is able to calculate the actual geometry but not the nominal
geometry, “0” will be entered for Vector, Diameter/Radius, Nor-
mal Vector, Gap and Start Angle and “360°” will be entered for the
angle range for a circle.
Actual to Nominal In the case of constructions, the nominal values calculated from the nom-
inal values of the linked features may excessively differ from the actual
values.
In this case, you can enter nominal values instead of actual values. The
value is entered as a formula with a constant value; the input field is
highlighted in yellow.
By clicking the Actual -> Nominal button, you enter the corresponding
actual value as a formula for each nominal value (x, y, z, w1, w2...). The
actual value is rounded beforehand using the set rounding factor.
Start point
circle
Features
It must be possible to measure the feature according to the “Unknown
Contour” method.
– If you have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you must use
a 2D curve.
– If you do not have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you
can also use a 2D line or a circle.
NOTICE
If you use the 2D line or the circle as a nominal feature, you must neither
filter this contour nor eliminate its outliers. Otherwise, certain points in
the kink area may be eliminated and the result might be incorrect.
Outliers
Mean-value line
Measured contour
Nominal features
Select 2D lines or circles (or circle on cone) as a first and second nominal
feature. Make sure that the nominal features are defined exactly:
– For a circle, make sure that the start angle and the angle range as well
as the inside/outside are defined in addition to the center point, align-
ment and radius.
– For a 2D line, the normal vector (negative probing direction of the
points) must be defined in addition to the feature reference point,
direction and length.
– The sequence of the start and end points of the nominal features must
correspond to the recorded measuring points.
NOTICE
Only the definitions in the definition template of the feature are impor-
tant; the strategy definitions (paths, technologies) are not evaluated by
CALYPSO.
Result calculation
The result of the Kink Point construction is a 3D point at the transition
from one feature to the other.
Direct input You can also enter this point directly. The entered coordinates of the
nominal point are interpreted as formulas with the corresponding nu-
merical value.
No result If feature and both nominal features are defined, but the nominal kink
point cannot be calculated, a zero vector is output as nominal value.
100:1
In this case, however, the searched step point is not probed. CALYPSO
can calculate this point from the probing data, the reference and the
entered step angle.
Feature and reference The following features are possible features and references:
NOTICE
Filtering and outlier elimination are disabled for the feature.
Recalled line as reference You can also use a line as reference which has been generated via point
recall from the measured points of the lines used as feature.
NOTICE
Make sure that only those points are recalled that lie on the same level.
Otherwise, an inclined computed feature is calculated and the result is
thus falsified.
Step Angle For the calculation of the step point, you also define the step angle, which
is, for example, the angle at the cutting edge of the reamer. CALYPSO
will then calculate based on the upper step point the lower step point
using a trigonometric function.
The unit of measure of the step angle is predefined in the system settings.
Entries from 10° to 90° are allowed; the entry 90°, i.e. a vertical edge, is
preset.
You can also enter a formula in the input field. The result of the formula
is always interpreted in radian measure.
Result calculation
The result of the Step Point construction is a 3D point. You can select
between two results: the upper and the lower step point. The lower step
point is output by default.
Measurement strategy
The following prerequisites are important for the precise calculation of
the step point:
– Highest possible point density
– Sufficient start-up time at the beginning and run-out time at the end
of the path
– Scanning direction from the “higher” to the “lower” step (side of the
bore towards the reaming side).
When scanning in the opposite direction, the stylus could bounce off
the step and lead to an inaccurate measurement.
– Smallest possible stylus
– Cylinder reference feature measured on the reamed surface.
This reduces the scattering of the measured points.
The context menu of the index cards offers the following options:
– Create New Strategy Name: Creates an additional strategy for
the measurement plan. It is possible to define this strategy in the cur-
rent feature.
– Delete Strategy Name: Deletes the current strategy for the entire
measurement plan.
– Edit Strategy Name: Opens the window for editing the strategy
name.
3 Then, define the strategy lists of the new strategy for all features in
question.
If not, the index card with the strategy remains empty.
Performing a strategy During measurement, the tasks in the current strategy list are executed
one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is assigned will be
skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
If the current strategy has not yet been defined for a feature, CALYPSO
uses the defined evasion strategy.
Path generation
Point list
Utilities
Single Points / Auto Edit strategy
Path Switch (paths)
Strategy tab
Strategy macro
Strategy list
You will find more information on this window under Strategy in the
CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
• Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. First
make sure that the CMM can move freely.
• Cut, Copy and Paste are standard Windows functions.
• Edit: Opens a window with the input parameters (also with a dou-
ble click).
• Sort Nominal Directions: Corrects all normal vectors matching
the normal direction of the first point.
• Single Points => Point Set: Converts the selected single points
into a point set.
• Point Set => Single Points: Converts the selected point set into
single points.
• Reverse Order: Reverses the order of the marked features in the
strategy list.
• Condition: Opens a window in which you can assign a condition
to the current task. The task is not executed unless the condition is
fulfilled.
• List: (Only for curves) Opens the point list containing the measured
values (coordinates, normal vector, deviation) of the segment.
• Invert: (Only for curves) Reverses the start and end point of the
segment and thus the measuring direction.
• Group for the measurement: (Only for curves) Handles the
selected segments as a single segment with regard to traveling.
Evaluation range
The measured points of the evaluation range are exclusively used for the
calculation of the computed feature. However, the excluded points are
included in the plot.
Paths with evaluation You can set an evaluation range for the following path generation meth-
range ods:
NOTICE
The definition of an evaluation range does not make any sense if the
angle range of the path exceeds 360°.
Definition of the evalua- Define the evaluation range using one of the following methods:
tion range – by specifying the start and end length or start and end angle refer-
enced to the total length or the total angle of the contour.
All measuring points are evaluated of which the appropriate length
or angle lies within the specified range.
– by specifying the start and end points referenced to the coordinate
system to be selected.
The perpendicular is drawn from the start and end point to the nom-
inal contour and all measuring points located within this range are
evaluated.
When making entries, the specifications for the dialog elements of the
other definition method are calculated and displayed automatically.
Specification with for- You can enter a formula in each input field for the evaluation range.
mula However, the input fields of the other definition method are disabled. If,
for example, you enter a formula for the start length, you can no longer
enter the coordinates of the start point.
NOTICE
When entering the formula, you must also enter the PCM reference sys-
tem for the start and end coordinates. This reference system applies to
all positions in the current feature that are specified in formulas.
Under certain circumstances, the correct points are selected: If, for ex-
ample, you used formulas of which the variables have not yet been speci-
fied. In this case, you can confirm the question and accept the values.
Angle units You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for circle
paths, large (radial) circle paths and circles on a plane using angles. These
refer to the surface area of the geometry. In the case of the Sphere feature
with inclined strategy axis, the surface area and the axis are also inclined.
The start and end angles can also be exchanged – the range between the
two specified angles is always used as the evaluation range.
You can enter angles between 0° and 360°. All other entries are con-
verted to modulo 360°.
The intersection of the u axis of the element system of the geometry with
the plane of the geometry represents the origin for the angle units. By
way of confirmation, the total angle of the strategy is indicated.
An exception to this procedure is the small (axial) circle path (scanned on
the small radius) at the torus. With this strategy, the angle specifications
are not applied to the surface area but to the intersecting surface at the
point of the first axial section. If the small (axial) circle path contains sev-
eral sections, the start and end points around the axis of the torus are
turned in relation to the corresponding sections.
When closing the input page with OK , the program checks whether the
start and the end point of the evaluation range are in the center of the
circle. In this case, it is not possible to determine any angle range for the
evaluation range.
Coordinate system type The second option of defining the evaluation range is to determine two
points. The start and end points are projected at a right angle onto the
path. The projected points determine the evaluation range.
The following applies to circular paths: The evaluation range is evaluated
according to the direction of the strategy. If the angle range of the strat-
egy is positive, the evaluation range expands from the start point to the
end point in the mathematical positive direction of rotation (normal of
the geometry seen from the top). In the case of a negative angle range,
the evaluation range expands in the opposite direction.
The following applies to straight paths: The start and end points can be
exchanged.
You can switch over the coordinate system for the point definitions. The
following systems are available:
– Base alignment (the coordinates are shown in the base alignment)
– Coordinate system (the coordinates are shown in the coordinate sys-
tem of the geometry)
– Feature (the coordinates are shown in the feature alignment of the
geometry)
NOTICE
The coordinate system is switched over at the same time for all path gen-
erations of the feature.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Base Alignment or Workpiece Align-
ment, the points of the evaluation ranges are not offset with the feature
if the nominal position of the geometry is changed.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Feature Alignment, the points of the eval-
uation ranges are offset if the nominal position of the geometry is
changed. This behavior is the same as the strategies of single points, in-
termediate points, etc.
When closing the definition template for the feature, the program auto-
matically switches back to Feature System. During the CNC run, the
points of the evaluation range are calculated back to the base alignment
and compared with the determined points (these are stored in the base
alignment).
Qualifying a feature The evaluation is inactive if you measure the feature manually (e.g. in the
with the evaluation case of manual base or start alignment).
range manually
Recall feature points If you access the determined points via the recall feature points function,
the points which are outside the evaluation range are also recalled. The
recalled points retain their mark.
The evaluation range can also be restricted with regard to features which
are determined by recalling points. This is the only way of evaluating a
feature which was once measured with various evaluation ranges.
Point list
Then the stylus can “slowly approach” with less movement the bottom
of the V-groove in the X axis.
Call To call the Probe Self Centering window, you have three options:
– Activation for all features of a measurement plan:
Select Edit ® Deselect and select Resources ® Stylus sys-
tem ® Probe Self Centering.
– Activation for a certain feature
Highlight the feature in the measurement plan and select Resour-
ces ® Stylus system ® Probe Self Centering.
– Activation only for a certain strategy (e.g. probing point) of a feature
Click Strategy in the definition template. Open the corresponding
strategy in the strategy list (e.g. the probing point) and click Self-
centering on the Special Settings tab.
1 Tick the Probe Self Centering check box and set the parameters.
Measuring point
Contact points
Nominal point
Desired used
nominal point
NOTICE
Self-centering scanning without rotary table is only possible with the C99
control.
Restrictions Self-centering scanning is intended for circles. Therefore, avoid extreme
slopes.
NOTICE
The slope refers to the section surface and not to the cone axis.
Pitch
and the same stylus because the probing direction is different for each
feature.
Example: 8 bores Eight bores are to be measured on a rotationally symmetrical part; these
bores are defined in CALYPSO as cylinders with rotationally symmetrical
pattern. This pattern cannot be measured at first without a rotary table
and without RDS-CAA, as it is unclear which styli are to be used for the
individual positions.
If you have activated the automatic stylus search and a stylus is available
for each required direction, CALYPSO can measure the cylinder without
difficulty.
Principle of the automat- This is how the automatic stylus search works: CALYPSO searches
ic stylus search through all qualified positions of a stylus system and compares the shaft
direction of each stylus with the planned probing direction.
– For a cylindrical or circular feature, CALYPSO uses the axis of the fea-
ture.
– In the case of a planar feature, CALYPSO uses its normal.
CALYPSO uses the stylus with the smallest angle between stylus shaft and
axis or normal to perform the measurement. In order to make the result
unambiguous, you have to specify how this angle is to be measured – i.e.
whether the axis or normal is to be oriented nearly in the direction of the
shaft or in the opposite direction of the shaft.
Angle at Angle at
„shaft against normal“ „shaft along normal“
NOTICE
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point to
the tip of the stylus.
CALYPSO minimizes either the angle between the stylus shaft and the
axis or normal, or the angle in the opposite direction of the axis or normal.
The direction you have to choose depends on the geometry of your work-
piece.
Maximum angle To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder meas-
urements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
If there is no stylus in the permitted angle range, CALYPSO is unable to
probe. The CNC run is halted, and you receive a corresponding message.
NOTICE
A requirement for the automatic stylus search is that all the required styli
or stylus positions must be qualified.
The shaft direction must also be specified for qualification. (A query ap-
pears asking for the probing angle if probing has not been in the direction
of the main axis of the CMM.)
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Open the strategy window for the probing, e.g. Probing point.
3 Under Stylus, select one of the two Auto entries:
Auto1: Shaft away from normal: The stylus whose angle be-
tween shaft direction and opposite direction to the normal or axis of
the feature is the smallest is set.
Auto2: Shaft along normal: The stylus whose angle between
shaft direction and normal or axis of the feature is the smallest is set.
Note: The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening
point to the tip of the stylus.
4 Press OK to confirm.
In the CNC run, the corresponding styli are dynamically selected and
assigned.
Note: You can also make the Auto1 and Auto2 entries via the Meas-
urement Plan Editor Features.
Fixed path
Normally, CALYPSO uses the shortest path from one point to the next for
discrete-point probing. Collisions may occur under certain conditions. For
example, there may be a pin inside a circle path on plane or a polyline
may run around an object.
To avoid such collisions, you can fix the travel path. Then, the stylus moves
along the path defined in the feature without taking any shortcuts.
For this purpose, tick the Fixed path check box in the Special Set-
tings of the path generation method.
NOTICE
You must have qualified your stylus with the Tensor setting in order to
use path generation for scanning (see ➤Preparing the stylus sys-
tem [⇨ 3‑15]).
A measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, from the
group of the feature (shape, position, size) through tolerance up to the
stylus used. CALYPSO uses these parameters to calculate starting param-
eters of the CMM that lead to the best possible compliance with the
tolerance you demand. You only have to enter the minimum data.
With path generation you can
– continuously record measuring points and generate paths from single
points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe.
– or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a CMM
with trigger probe (pseudo scanning).
Path generation is a macro that automatically measures a feature with set
parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or screws on
a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point density and thus
adequate information about the workpiece surface. High point densities
are the prerequisite for standardized, extremely accurate evaluation of
your features.
To use a path generation method, follow these steps:
– Set the global settings for evaluation of the characteristics groups in
the default settings (see ➤Changing the measurement parameters of
the CMM [⇨ 10‑14]).
– Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See ➤Defining
features [⇨ 4‑2].
– Assign a path generation method.
– Check and/or change the settings of the path generation method.
Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps:
– Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.
– Making general settings.
Path
generation
method
Strategy list
To change the setting, click the displayed icon. (You have chosen path
generation if the points are displayed connected.)
3 Click the button for the path generation method you want.
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the same
time, CALYPSO immediately generates the path from the single points if
you choose this in step 3.
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width (step distance).
Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
A description of the parameters for each path generation method can be
found in:
– ➤Path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone [⇨ 4‑189]
– ➤Path generation methods for planes: the Polyline [⇨ 4‑194]
– ➤Path generation methods for planes: the Grid [⇨ 4‑196]
– ➤Path generation methods for planes: the Circle Path [⇨ 4‑197]
– ➤Path generation of lines [⇨ 4‑199]
6 Enter the values for the path generation method. For more details,
please refer to ➤Path generation – measuring features automatical-
ly [⇨ 4‑182].
7 Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for this
feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from ➤Features you can
measure with path generation [⇨ 4‑184].
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be exe-
cuted once a CNC run is initiated.
Enter the start point and end point of the travel path in the strategy win-
dow for the unknown contour.
CALYPSO executes the measurement using the “shortest path” – while,
of course, observing the feature and keeping in contact with the work-
piece.
Immersion depth To avoid unintentional scanning “in the air” when scanning an unknown
contour, an “immersion depth” of 0.3 mm is set. This default value may
be too high for very flat objects so that there is a risk of touching the
material. For such cases, you can set the Immersion Depth for Scan-
ning Unknown Contour to “Middle” or “Low” in the Measurement
Plan Editor Features.
Generating the path You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
from the CAD model model. When you use this method, the system returns a series of either
start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account: Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generate different
paths. (At this time, the function is implemented only for the circle and
circle path.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the path data, CALYPSO
does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal
of latitude in defining paths.
Assembling a circle path If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with a single
stylus (e.g. in the case of a full circle on a camshaft), split the circle path
into circle sections to scan each section with an appropriate stylus.
The individual arcs can be combined in a circle path by means of the
“Group Circle Paths” function.
After the measurement, the circle path is assembled from the selected
circle sections and evaluated.
Entering formulas for The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Select the For-
path parameters mula entry in the context menu of the fields. You can use the variables
that are defined in the measurement plan to make formulas and enter
PCM commands if you use the PCM Technology option.
The following entries can be parameterized.
– Scanning speed
– Step width
– Number of points
– Start angle (input in radians!)
– Angle range (input in radians!)
– Stylus
Parameterizing single Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be parameter-
points and intermediate ized. Here, it will be necessary to define the reference system. To do so,
positions click PCM-Ref in the Point List window.
Origin of feature's
local
Coordinate System X
min. measuring
height
Measuring range
max. measuring
height
Evaluation range If certain start and end points are not suitable for the evaluation, you can
define an evaluation range.
Resulting circle path Start, end and direction of rotation of the assembled circle path result
according to the following rules:
– The direction of rotation of the assembled circle path corresponds to
the direction of rotation of the first circle section in the strategy list.
– The assembled circle path begins after the largest gap between two
adjacent circle sections.
The illustration below shows the relationships.
(3) (3)
(2)
(1)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
(1)
(2)
Removing a group To remove a group, select one of the appropriate circle paths and choose
Select Group in the context menu.
Click the Group Circle Paths icon. The group is removed.
Removing from group To remove individual circle paths from a group, highlight the desired circle
paths and select Remove From Group in the context menu.
Measuring threads
Use the circle macro for measuring cylindrical tapped holes.
Conditions:
– A feature of the Circle type has been defined.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template for the circle.
2 Click the icon for the “Circle Macro” path generation method.
3 Tick the Thread check box and enter the desired number of probings,
pattern and orientation of the thread.
4 Press OK to confirm.
You are prompted whether the stylus is in the center of the circle.
5 Position the stylus with the shaft parallel to the axis of the circle in the
center of the tapped hole and confirm with Yes.
Starting at the current height, CALYPSO performs 4 probings at a dis-
tance of 90° each by considering the pattern and orientation of the
thread. The center of the circle is computed from the 4 points gained.
Then CALYPSO carries out the actual thread measurements. They are
entered as individual points in the strategy list.
The further procedure is the same as for the circle measurement.
Note: You can also use the circle macro for the thread measurement
several times in succession, e.g. at different heights of the thread.
Polyline
PlaFron
Datum Features
Expected Tolerance
Speed
Step Width
Number of Points
Stylus #2 Star_2
Single points
Feature Alignment
Polyline
Number Insert
Edge deviation
OK Reset
Defining a polyline On the Basic options tab, you can compose your polyline of single
points which are connected with each other by straight lines or arcs. By
clicking Insert or probing on the CAD model, you add nodes to the list
and select the type of connection.
You can use the arrows to reduce the list or enlarge it to the maximum
number of recorded points.
Fixed path The Special Settings tab allows you to make further settings, e.g. for
FlyScan and fixed path.
E.g., if the polyline runs around subassemblies, direct paths from one
point to the other may cause collisions during discrete-point probing. In
such cases, we recommend fixing the travel path.
Then, the stylus does not use the direct path to move from one point of
the polyline to the next but the defined path, thus avoiding collisions.
Creating a polyline
1 Probe the points on the plane from which you want to create the
polyline. You can do this with the CMM or the CAD window (you will
find more information in the Online Help under ➤Defining probing
points in the CAD window [⇨ 2‑44]).
Each entered measuring point is displayed in the coordinates list (from
bottom to top). CALYPSO connects these points with lines by default.
You can select the coordinate system for the display of the points. The
points are saved in the local feature alignment.
2 You always need the start point, direction point and end point if you
want to create an arc or full circle. The three points have to be dis-
played in the coordinates list. Use the arrow buttons next to the
Number field to do so.
3 Click the arc or full circle icon.
The green border now encloses the three points from which the arc
or full circle was calculated. You see the new connection in the CAD
window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at any
time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
Make sure that you have entered a value for the rounding-off of corners
in the default settings. Check this value by clicking Basic Settings and
then the SCAN Limits tab.
Then, the stylus does not use the direct path to move from one point of
the circle path to the next but the defined circle path, thus avoiding col-
lisions.
Activate these settings on the Special Settings tab.
2D Line Fro
Expected Tolerance
Speed
Step Width
Number of Points
Stylus #1 Star_1
Single points
Measurement
Extended
Start
Length
OK Reset
The “Line” strategy does not need to comprise the entire “2D Line” fea-
ture. If you tick Extended, you can select Start and Length in such a way
that part of the 2D line is scanned. If the definition template is opened,
you can also predefine the start and end point with the mouse on the
CAD model in the CAD window.
By means of several “Line” strategies, you can also measure 2D lines dur-
ing the course of which interruptions may occur on the workpiece.
Travel path
Any definitions already saved in the strategy defaults for the rectangular
path will be predefined here.
Entries Enter here the Measuring Height and the distances of the probing
paths to the corners.
With Independent Lines, you can define different edge distances for
each side and each corner.
By means of Move to Safety Position, you initiate the stylus to move
to the safety position after each individual path. If the check box is un-
ticked, the stylus moves around the corners on the measuring height level.
Strategy defaults
The strategy defaults for the rectangular path allow you to predefine the
input fields included in the Rectangular Path strategy.
As a special feature you can enter here the edge distances as absolute
values, as a multitude of the stylus radius or as a percentage. In the Rec-
tangular Path technology window, the specifications are converted into
absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the
nominal values of the rectangle.
Defining characteristics
.................................................................................................................
You can add other special features as characteristics. In this case, they are
not actually characteristics, but they will be processed during the CNC
run. For more information, please refer to ➤Utilities [⇨ 5‑128].
Defining characteristics
Options for defining characteristics
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is nec-
essary to define the characteristics.
Characteristics, features and the links between them are assigned to a
measurement plan.
CALYPSO CALYPSO offers the following options of adding characteristics to the
measurement plan and linking them to features:
– You ➤add a characteristic [⇨ 5‑5] via the menu bar or from the
toolbox to the list of characteristics and specify it in the definition
template.
In the definition template, you assign the features to the characteristic
(➤Connecting characteristics to features [⇨ 5‑14]).
– You add one or several characteristics implicitly to the measurement
plan by defining them in the definition template of a feature. See
➤Definition template for features [⇨ 4‑5].
– You load a CAD file (SAT, ProE or UniGraphics) and extract form and
location data from it. The features are added to the measurement plan
together with the characteristics. For more details, please refer to
➤Extracting characteristics from CAD files [⇨ 5‑5].
Options The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing
measurement plan data:
– DMIS import (DMIS Input Postprocessor option)
You import runs programmed in DMIS and thereby create a new reg-
ular CALYPSO measurement plan (see the operating instructions for
DMIS Import (option)).
– Import of CAD files from ProE and UG (by means of the Characteristic
IN option)
You import features together with the characteristics from the ProE
and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given
format (STEP file in the AP 203 or AP 214 format and ASCII data in
the Q-DAS format, specification of WEPROM) (see the operating in-
structions for Characteristic IN (option)).
– Import of Agipp data for manufacturing segments (by means of the
Characteristic IN option) (see the operating instructions for Charac-
teristic IN (option)).
You can find more detailed information regarding the different charac-
teristics in ➤Overview of characteristics [⇨ 5‑78].
Color Meaning
Light gray The characteristic has not yet been defined fully.
With The characteristic has been masked in the Measurement Plan Edi-
mask icon tor Characteristics. It is not checked during the CNC run and it is not
evaluated in printouts.
Dark gray The characteristic has been defined fully.
Measuring results are not yet available.
Green The characteristic has been defined.
The measured results are within the tolerance.
Yellow The characteristic has been defined.
The measured results exceed the warning limit but are still within the
tolerance.
Red The characteristic has been defined.
The measured results are outside the tolerance.
NOTICE
This function is currently only available for the CAD files in the CATIA V,
ProE (with limitations), and UG formats.
– For better understanding, the characteristic information included in
the CAD data can be displayed or hidden according to different cri-
5 If required, you can move the banners in the CAD window with the
mouse.
If the CATIA file does not contain any structure, CALYPSO creates a
structure using the TOLERANCES, DATUMS and TEXT desks.
3 Use the commands of the context menu in the structure tree:
• Select Delete to delete an entire desk.
• Select Edit to rename a desk.
• Select Clipping Plane to display a section plane contained in the
CAD data.
• Select Remove From Group to remove the marked feature from
the desk.
4 To create a new desk, highlight the desired features in the CAD win-
dow and click New layer from screen.
The features marked by a flag in the CAD window are summarized in
a new desk and the current view of the CAD window is saved at the
same time.
NOTICE
The converted characteristic will not be renamed automatically.
NOTICE
The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the se-
lected characteristic.
There are three ways of opening a definition template:
– Highlight the characteristic and click the Open selected object
icon.
– Select the Open entry in the context menu of the characteristic.
– Double-click the characteristic.
The definition template contains fields for tolerance and actual value. The
buttons for the required references of this characteristic will still be shown
as empty.
Example: Definition template of the True Position characteristic:
Playing a video To play a video about the definition of the True Position characteristic,
click 015_DinPos1_d_GrosseMaus.htm.
Direct input
Enter the name of an existing feature in the input field.
After the entry, two icons are displayed on the right-hand side. The name
is accepted by clicking the checkmark. The name is not accepted by click-
ing the cross, pressing Esc or by changing to another dialog box.
If the entered name does not exist, the first name in the list of features
that contains the entered character string is shown.
Input field
List of features
You enter the formula for the feature or reference feature and transfer it
to the input field by selecting OK. The input field will be highlighted in
yellow.
NOTICE
The result of the formula input must be a text. CALYPSO transfers only
the entries to the input field which can be selected in the list of features.
CALYPSO checks whether the defined feature exists and whether is may
be used as a feature or reference feature. This means that it is also not
possible to specify a plane as feature for a roundness by means of a for-
mula.
If a feature does not exist or may not be used, the evaluation of the tol-
erance does not produce any result. This applies to both the parameter-
ized features and the parameterized reference features.
the other, Circle1 has already been entered for the first feature of each
characteristic.
Checking use You can check for which characteristics a feature is used. Use the Check
use of selected Features command which you can find in the context
menu in the list of features.
Characteristics with in- You can assign indexes to characteristics. Thus, you define with one def-
dexes inition template several characteristics of the same type. For details, please
refer to ➤Characteristics with indexes [⇨ 5‑24].
Selection of datums
Datums are selected on the basis of the following criteria:
– A primary datum should constrain the following degrees of freedom:
– two rotational degrees of freedom for the calculation of the geo-
metrical feature
– one or two translational degrees of freedom
The primary datum must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a
plane, a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
– The secondary datum constrains usually the remaining rotational de-
gree of freedom.
The secondary datum must be set by the following features: a plane,
a 2D line or a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
– A single additional feature provides the remaining one or two trans-
lational degrees of freedom.
NOTICE
The designations primary, secondary and tertiary datum do not refer to
the order in which they were entered in the definition template as pri-
mary, secondary and tertiary datum. For example, you can also enter the
tertiary datum as primary datum.
NOTICE
For computation according to ISO 5459, only the “Outer Tangential El-
ement” evaluation method is useful. Moreover, the datums must be
measured with a large number of points.
Both methods produce a datum reference frame with the same orienta-
tion. However, the systems have different origins.
CALYPSO standard According to the CALYPSO standard, a feature (a plane in the example)
is computed from the first datum by means of the LSQ best fit. A feature
(a plane in the example) is also computed from the secondary datum. The
origin of the datum reference frame to be created lies on the intersection
line of both features. The second feature is not necessarily perpendicular
to the first feature. Therefore, the plane perpendicular to the first plane
is used as the coordinate plane of the datum reference frame. Proceed in
the same way for the tertiary datum.
B Ø 0,1 A B
B
Ø 0,1 B A
1
A
Bezüge nach Calypso
ISO 5459 The ISO 5459 requires that the origin of the datum reference frame is
defined as intersection point of perpendicular planes. Consequently, the
secondary datum cannot be calculated as a computed feature from the
defined feature. It is created as the outer tangential element with restric-
tion of constraints whereas the direction of the coordinate plane is preset
by the required perpendicularity relative to the first coordinate plane.
Proceed in the same way for the tertiary datum.
B Ø 0,1 A B
B
Ø 0,1 B A
A 90°
3D Line Plane
Cylinder Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder 2D Line
Cone 3D Line
Cylinder
3D Line Plane Step Cylinder
Cylinder Symmetry Plane Cone
Step Cylinder 2D Line [Nothing]
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
[Nothing]
Step Cylinder
Cone
Plane
[Nothing]
Symmetry Plane
2D Line
Characteristics in loops
To assign indexes to characteristics, place a loop around the feature.
Then, the loop parameters are included in the name of the characteristic.
Example: You place a loop with the start index 1, end index 5 and the
step width 2 around the “X-Value1” characteristic. The characteristic
generated in this way is named “(1,5,2)X-Value1”.
Purpose of the function This characteristic represents a series of characteristics that differ in the
value of the loop variable (e.g. LOOP1). The LOOP1 loop variable must,
of course, have been used for the definition of the characteristic to make
sure that these characteristics differ from each other.
Example: You use the LOOP1 loop variable in the name of the feature to
which the characteristic refers. This gives a 1:1 relation between several
features (of the same type) and several characteristics (of the same type).
Characteristic Feature
Roundness1(1) Circle1(4)
Roundness1(2) Circle1(6)
Roundness1(3) Circle1(8)
Roundness1(4) Circle1(4)
Roundness1(5) Circle1(2)
Roundness1(6) Circle1(8)
Roundness1(7) Circle1(6)
Roundness1(8) Circle1(4)
You define for the “Circle1” feature an index exchange with three
groups:
NOTICE
The example shows that the relation between the characteristic and the
feature may not be clear after the index exchange: The Circle1(4) feature
is not only measured in the Roundness1(1) characteristic but also in the
Roundness1(4) characteristic.
Only the first use found is recorded in the compact printout.
Job
Calculation of the following distances:
– Distance1(1) between Circle1(1) and Circle2(2)
– Distance1(2) between Circle1(2) and Circle2(3)
– Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(4) etc., i.e.
Distance1(i) between Circle1(i) and Circle2(i+1) with i = 1, ...,7.
Solution
Index exchange between the current loop index of the characteristic and
the Circle2(*) feature.
1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 In the context menu of the Circle2(*) feature, select Index ex-
change....
3 Enter the parameters in the Loop window: Start = 2, End = 8, Step =
1.
The distance is calculated as shown above.
Note: The tolerances determine the calculation of the scanning speed for
the measuring strategy. See ➤Path generation – measuring features au-
tomatically [⇨ 4‑182].
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Enter the desired nominal values in the Nominal input field (or
Nominal Position input field).
3 Enter the tolerance values:
• Direct input
Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance input fields
• Selection list for the tolerance group
Enter the appropriate values in the Upper Tolerance and Lower
Tolerance fields. The Last input list entry allows you to enter the
most recently selected tolerance.
• None check box
This box allows you to define the maximum and minimum tolerances.
4 Click OK.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described under Definition tem-
plate (Characteristic) 1 in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green, yellow or red bar, depending on whether it is inside or
outside of the warning limits and tolerance.
If a completely defined feature has not been measured yet, the icon is
displayed with a dark gray bar.
Settings There are two options for changing the MMC/LMC mode:
– for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras ® Set-
tings ® Measurement, MMC/LMC tab)
– for individual measurement plans in the Measurement Plan Edi-
tor Characteristics
Selection list
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the entry:
The Nominals button appears beside the selection list.
• MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
• LMC to apply the least-material condition.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the feature,
click Nominals.
CALYPSO opens the definition template of the characteristic:
• Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
• Press OK to confirm.
5 Define reference features if necessary.
As mechanical gauge
Inside feature dAct - (dNom + tlower)
Outside feature (dNom + tupper) - dAct
This means:
Stepped cylinder In general, there are several diameters for the stepped cylinder. For the
calculation of the tolerance addition, first the tolerance additions for all
pitch cylinders are calculated for which the Diameter characteristic is ac-
tivated. The smallest of these values applies to the tolerance addition for
the stepped cylinder. If the smallest calculated value is negative, the tol-
erance addition will be zero.
If the stepped cylinder is used as reference for a “True Position” or “Best
Fit of Bore Pattern with MMC/LMC” characteristic, no tolerance addition
will be calculated but the 2D best fit function is used instead.
5 Tick the check boxes of the properties you want to copy to other char-
acteristics.
6 Select the characteristics to which you want to copy properties.
7 Click OK.
The window shows a summary of the current settings. Changes are per-
formed on the other tabs.
Alternative call You can also double-click the icon of the measurement plan and select
the desired feature and the evaluation setting of interest in the Selec-
tion dialog box.
Playing a video To play a video about filters and outliers elimination, click 018_Ausreis-
serFilter_720x.htm.
Computed feature
To understand and correctly interpret measured results, you need to
know how CALYPSO calculates the corresponding standard geometric
element from the CMM's measured points.
Using the measured points, CALYPSO calculates a computed feature.
Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which best fits the
resulting measured values in terms of the standard geometry. The com-
puted feature is the basis for evaluating the measuring results. Depending
on the best-fit method used, the features determined in this manner can
differ slightly from each other. Thus, there are also different deviations of
the measured feature from the specified nominal feature.
This is why the computed feature and the corresponding ➤best-fit meth-
od [⇨ 5‑39] are fundamental to the accuracy of nominal-actual compar-
isons carried out via the characteristics.
NOTICE
The optimum best-fit methods are the default settings for the respective
characteristic groups.
Best-fit methods
outlier
Gauss element
Minimum element (Chebyshov)
Circumscribed element
Inscribed element
Actual outline
As the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the result of the
best fit, this best-fit method is very susceptible to outliers.
Recommendation: a large number of points and additional outlier elimi-
nation and/or low-pass filtering, depending on the measuring require-
ments (see ➤Eliminating outliers [⇨ 5‑51] and ➤Setting and activating
a filter [⇨ 5‑43]). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.
NOTICE
Once the minimum number of points has been changed to 7, filtering
might no longer be possible for certain features in measurement plans
created with older versions of CALYPSO because the number of points is
no longer sufficient. The “No result” message appears in the default
printout.
0
s/100 s/2 c
UPR 100 2
Band-pass A band-pass filter results from the combined use of a low-pass and a high-
pass filter. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave
(surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively
specified limit.
Eliminating outliers
Outliers are measured points that differ significantly from the geometric
form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce
a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this
nature would easily propagate through the actual-value determination of
the characteristic.
Repeated outlier elimi- Outlier elimination runs iteratively. You can predefine the number of iter-
nation ations. Outlier recognition becomes more precise with each iteration step.
NOTICE
If the selected number of iterations is too high, the number of remaining
points may decrease to the minimum number of points.
Prefilter Prior to the outlier recognition, the measured points are filtered through
a band-pass. Thus, measured values that are otherwise not detectable as
outliers can likewise be eliminated.
A measured (prefiltered) point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than
a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the com-
puted Gaussian element (LSQ feature).
For measurement plans version 4.0 and higher, you define the charac-
teristic of the band-pass (➤Eliminating outliers [⇨ 5‑51]). In previous
versions of CALYPSO measurement plans, the prefilter is not variable. To
activate prefilter setting, you must set the outlier elimination to version
4.0 in the compatibility settings.
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width or the same step distance. Other-
wise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
Settings
File
Import Export
Size
Linear Features Circular Features Outlier Elimination
No Filter No Filter No Outlier
Location
Linear Features Circular Features Outlier Elimination
No Filter No Filter No Outlier
Form (without Line Profile, Curve Form and Profile of a Free Form Surface)
Filter Circular Features Outlier Elimination
Datum Features
Linear Features Circular Features Outlier Elimination
OK Cancel Apply
Evaluation... - X Value1
Feature 1
CylTopCe
Filter on
upr
Wavelength
mm
Filter Type
2 RC-Filter
Filter Type
Low-pass
Band-pass
High-pass
Connect Segments
OK Cancel Apply
Wz 15 50 150 500
Wt 20 40 80 10 20 40 5 10 20 2.5 5 10
Tk Smallest measurable inside diameter [mm]
1 mm 2.7 3.5 4.8 5.5 7.6 10.5 11.1 15.5 21.7 25.5 35.9 50.5
2 mm 4.2 5.4 7.1 8.1 11 15.2 16 22.2 31 36.4 51.0 71.7
3 mm 5.5 6.9 9 10.3 13.8 18.9 19.9 27.5 38.3 44.8 62.8 88.1
5 mm 7.9 9.7 12.3 14 18.5 25 26.3 36.1 50 58.5 81.6 114
8 mm 11.2 13.4 16.6 18.7 24.4 32.6 34.3 46.6 64.1 74.8 104 146
Tk Smallest measurable outside diameter [mm]
1 mm 1.7 2.5 3.8 4.5 6.6 9.5 11.1 15.5 21.7 24.5 34.9 49.5
2 mm 2.2 3.4 5.1 6.1 9 13.2 14 20.2 29 34.4 49 69.7
3 mm 2.5 3.9 6 7.3 10.8 15.9 16.9 24.5 35.3 41.8 59.8 85.1
5 mm 2.9 4.7 7.3 9 13.5 20 21.3 31.1 45 53.5 76.6 109
Wz 15 50 150 500
Wt 20 40 80 10 20 40 5 10 20 2.5 5 10
8 mm 3.2 5.4 8.6 10.7 16.4 24.6 26.3 38.6 56.1 66.8 96.1 138
Wz: Wave number [UPR]
Wt: Peak to valley [µm]
Tk: Stylus tip diameter
Please note that a strong filtering level with e.g. 15 UPR may especially
have an undesirable dampening effect on the result of form evaluations.
The filter levels are dependent on feature and component. They must be
selected so that no function-relevant details get lost. It is therefore rec-
ommended to perform a single analysis, thus enabling the determination
of the correct values. The following filter levels have been tried and tested
in the “measurement of form characteristics” and can be used as stand-
ard values for filtering circular or straight profiles. These standard values
apply likewise to the Gaussian and the spline profile filter.
Standard values for filter setting and number of measuring points for roundness check
Work- Only form Form and waviness Only waviness
piece di- Standard form meas- Form including chat- Periodic profile com-
ameter urement, e.g. wear/ ter marks, e.g. noise ponents, e.g. chatter
[mm] pairing mark size
Critical Measur- Critical Measur- Critical Measur-
wave ing wave ing wave ing
number points number points number points
[UPR] per revo- [UPR] per revo- [UPR] per revo-
lution lution lution
Up to 8 15 > 105 50 > 350 15 - 150 > 1050
> 8 to 25
> 25 to 80 50 > 350 150 > 1050 50 - 500 > 3500
> 80 to 250 150 > 1050 500 > 3500
> 250 500 > 3500 1500 > 10500 150 - 1500 > 10500
Standard values for filter setting and number of measuring points for flatness and straightness
check
Cut-off wave- Ra [µm] Rz [µm] Measuring Step size [mm]
length c [mm] points per mm
0.25 Up to 0.25 Up to 0.1 > 28 0.0357
0.80 > 0.25 to 0.4 > 0.1 to 1.6 > 8,75 0.1143
2.5 > 0.4 to 3.2 > 1.6 to 12.5 > 2.8 0.357
8 > 3.2 to 12.5 > 12.5 to 50 > 0.875 1.143
25 > 12.5 to 100 > 50 to 400 > 0.28 3.570
80 > 100 > 400 > 0.0875 11.430
Eliminating outliers
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click with the
left mouse button the icon of the feature.
The Evaluation dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Click the Outlier Elimination tab.
The tab is opened.
Evaluation... - X Value1
Feature 1
CylTopCe
Outlier on
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Only Outlier
Number
To Computed Feature
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
OK Cancel Apply
Include Include
Adjacent Outliers Adjacent
Points Points
+3s
Computed Feature
-3s
Outlier on
The Factor For Outlier refers to the standard deviation of the feature.
We recommend values between 2 and 3.
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
When using prefiltering, it has proven useful for many applications to run
the outlier recognition process twice instead of deleting neighboring
points in addition to the detected outliers.
Outlier on
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Only Outlier
Number
To Computed Feature
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
OK Apply Cancel
NOTICE
The parameters mentioned above are recommendations. No general
specifications are possible due to the individual influences of the shape,
surface roughness and number of scanning points. Therefore, we rec-
ommend performing an analysis on a representative component before
determining the parameters and including form plots for visual determi-
nation.
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
The example above shows that CALYPSO eliminates all probing points
exceeding the set limit. Probing points located within this limit will not be
deleted. This means that parts of the outlier (dirt, chips) may remain in
the evaluation as shown in the example above. It is therefore possible to
delete additional neighboring points of the outliers:
Only Outlier
Number
To Computed Feature
Remaining outlier
Computed feature
On the left side of the illustration above, the outlier is detected as it ex-
ceeds the range of the outlier factor. On the right side, an outlier of the
same size is not recognized. If the outlier is recognized, another problem
arises in this example:
Outlier
Due to the oval form, all points are located in the environment of the
outlier on the same side of the calculated circle. Therefore, the function
including neighboring points “To Computed Feature” deletes
too many points.
Prefiltering helps to avoid these problems.
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
When using prefiltering, it has proven useful for many applications to run
the outlier recognition process twice instead of deleting neighboring
points in addition to the detected outliers.
Outlier on
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Only Outlier
Number
To Computed Feature
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
OK Apply Cancel
Outlier on
The Factor For Outlier refers to the standard deviation of the feature.
We recommend values between 2 and 3.
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
The above mentioned settings cannot be used for planes measured with
the “Grid”, “Line” and “Polyline” strategies. The filter level must be
specified as Wavelength Lc.
As described above, the recommended prefilter setting must be selected
from the next lower level up to the next higher level of the filter used. For
example, filter with wavelength Lc 2,5:
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
When using prefiltering, it has proven useful for many applications to run
the outlier recognition process twice instead of deleting neighboring
points in addition to the recognized outliers.
Outlier on
Inside Workpiece
Outside Part
Only Outlier
Number
To Computed Feature
Wavelength Lc
From: to: mm
OK Apply Cancel
NOTICE
The parameters mentioned above are recommendations. No general
specifications are possible due to the individual influences of the shape,
surface roughness and number of scanning points. Therefore, we rec-
ommend performing an analysis on a representative component before
determining the parameters and including form plots for visual determi-
nation.
The standard deviation of this plane is relatively high. Therefore, only ex-
tremely deviating points are recognized and eliminated as outliers:
In this case, only the points marked in red are eliminated and not the real
outliers.
As some probing points of the outlier may be very close to the calculated
computed feature, the additional elimination of neighboring points is
useful:
Test of repeatability
A plane on an aluminum housing has been scanned 50 times. The fol-
lowing method has been used for flatness evaluation:
– Standard method (frequently used):
- Outlier elimination including the neighbors up to the computed fea-
ture
– Method with prefiltering:
Outlier recognition via prefiltering and elimination of outliers and of
40 neighbors
The unfiltered plane is a combination of form deviations with individual
outliers:
Standard method
Range: 23 µm
Cg value for 0.05 mm tolerance: 0.77
Prefilter method
Range: 4 µm
Cg value for 0.05 mm tolerance: 5.67
The comparison of the flatness plots of two different runs with the stand-
ard method shows the cause of the large range of the values:
Conclusion
The examples above show the advantage of prefiltering for outlier elim-
ination in the case of form deviations with a large low-frequency part.
This method, however, also enables in general a reliable elimination of
outliers, regardless of the frequency of the form parts. This is why the use
of prefiltering is recommended for all the data captured with scanning.
When using prefiltering, it has proven useful for many applications to run
the outlier recognition process twice instead of deleting neighboring
points in addition to the detected outliers.
No general specifications for the settings of any application cases are
possible due to the individual influences of the shape, surface roughness
and number of scanning points. Therefore, we recommend performing
an analysis on a representative component before determining the pa-
rameters and including form plots for visual determination.
Use the slider or the direct input option to set the outlier elimination and
the filtering continuously as a percentage of the nominal point number.
It is possible to enter the number of iterations for outlier elimination: In
this case, the algorithm of the outlier elimination is used again for the
points which have already been eliminated.
The effects of your setting are immediately shown in the camera image:
The points to be applied are displayed in green, the measuring points to
be eliminated are shown in red.
In addition, the number of all points and all applied points is shown in
the dialog box.
Select OK to transfer the measuring points to the new segment.
NOTICE
When performing a CNC run at a later stage, the settings made are saved
for the corresponding segment.
Defining ranges
1 Click Evaluation in the definition template of the corresponding
Line Auto Path or Circle feature.
2 Click in the Evaluation window the Manual button under Point
Masking.
The Manual Point Masking dialog box appears on the screen.
At the same time, the CAD window is changed: The view is centered
with regard to the selected feature and rotated accordingly. If a meas-
urement has already taken place, the actual points will be shown with
the selected magnification.
3 Click the corresponding icon and enter the ranges to be excluded from
the evaluation in the Masked Areas list.
For a circle you must enter angle ranges with start and end angle, for
a line you must enter line segments with start and end value.
Your entries are immediately shown in the CAD window; the ranges
are marked with read (start) and blue (end) lines.
You can remove a superfluous line from the list using DEL or Delete
in the context menu.
Note: All angle and coordinate definitions refer to the local alignment
of the feature. Thus the defined ranges are stable with regard to po-
sition changes.
4 If required, you can change the size and location of the displayed range
in the CAD window with the mouse.
5 Select the behavior during the CNC run:
• Accept areas automatically: In the CNC run, your defined
ranges are excluded from the evaluation.
• Manual Input: During the CNC run, you can define ranges by
means of the displayed measuring results immediately after the
measurement of the feature. The representation of the measuring
points is defined by clicking Properties in the Meas. Point Dis-
play window.
Note: You may also define the same setting for each feature in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geome-
try ® Manual Point Masking.
6 Click Apply to display in the case of existing measuring points the
current evaluation according to the set evaluation ranges.
Afterwards you can make additional changes.
7 If the ranges are correct, confirm your entries with OK.
NOTICE
There is no default presetting for user-defined characteristic attributes. If
no value is assigned to an attribute, the corresponding field will remain
empty.
NOTICE
After each modification of the configuration file, you must establish again
the connection to the CMM to activate the changes.
The format of the configuration file corresponds to the format of the INI
file for printout header data (userfields.ini). For more information, please
see ➤Reference: INI file for characteristic attributes [⇨ 5‑75].
Outputting attributes
The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in
the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.
NOTICE
If the corresponding setting in the configuration file of the Q-DAS con-
verter was made, these values are transferred to the Q-DAS statistics
program.
You can set the printout output for each attribute in the configuration
file. The characteristic attribute is output if a value is assigned to it.
To do so, you must change the setting of the value from “protocolOut-
put” to “true”. If the entry is missing or it is set to “false”, the attribute
is not shown in the printout.
The characteristic attributes are only output with the characteristics.
NOTICE
Save in simple ASCII format a file that has been edited in a spreadsheet
program and use tabulators as separators.
NOTICE
If you also want to edit the imported characteristic attributes in CALYPSO,
the “userattributes.ini” configuration file must contain the correspond-
ing entries with the same keywords.
– For each attribute with a selection list or combo box, the file contains
an additional section with the list of entries of the selection list or
combo box.
Each line in this section has the form <value>=<display>. The entries
under <display> are offered for selection; however, the entries under
<value> are only entered as attributes.
list)
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield with the name
"Part"
[u_k2005class_valueList]
0=0 unimportant
1=1 little important
2=2 important
3=3 significant
4=4 critical
Characteristic types
CALYPSO offers the following characteristics:
– Characteristics for size characteristics
– Standards
– Angle
– Distance
– Curve Dimensions
– More
– Cam evaluation
– Characteristics for form and location characteristics
The tables below list the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:
Radius Measure- Size Characteris- Determines the radius and the angle (specified in the
ment tics local feature alignment) of each individual probing
point in a specified sector. In this way the results for
a small arc segment can be enhanced (➤Radius Meas-
urement characteristic [⇨ 5‑88]).
Note: The angles are only output, if Additional Po-
sition Result is activated in the Measurement Plan
Editor Characteristics.
2 Point Diameter Size Characteris- Determines a minimum and a maximum diameter for
tics a circle or cylinder measured by scanning using one
of three methods (➤2 Point Diameter characteris-
tic [⇨ 5‑89]).
Length of per- Size Characteris- Determines the length of a perpendicular on a feature
pendicular tics (➤Length of Perpendicular characteristic [⇨ 5‑89]).
Polar position Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the
Radius tics Radius polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar co-
ordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.
Polar position Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the
Angle tics Angle polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar co-
ordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.
Polar position Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the
Height tics Height polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar co-
ordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.
Half Cone Angle Size Characteris- Determines the half angle of aperture of a cone (the
tics angle between the axis of the cone and the cone's
lateral surface).
Inclination An- Size Characteris- Determines a feature’s angle of inclination from the Z
gle tics axis of the part alignment.
Rotation Angle Size Characteris- Determines a feature's angle of rotation about the Z
tics axis, referenced to the X axis of the part alignment.
Feature Angle Size Characteris- Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of a fea-
tics ture assumes with the part alignment.
Distance Sym- Size Characteris- Determines the distance between the two reference
metry point tics features of a symmetry point.
Space Point Dis- Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a space point or net point
tance tics referenced to its nominal value.
Simple distance Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a “point feature” from the
tics origin of a coordinate system or the distances of two
“point features” from each other.
The distances output are those along the Cartesian
axes, along with the point-to-point distance (radius)
and the vector angle.
The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere, rec-
tangle or slot is always the midpoint.
Curve Distance Size Characteris- Determines the distance between two curves.
tics
Surface Area Size Characteris- Determines the surface area of a closed 2D curve.
tics
Focus 1 Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the first focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 1 Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the first focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the X value of the second focal point of
tics an ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the second focal point of
tics an ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the second focal point of
tics an ellipse.
Focus 1 Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the first focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 1 Size Characteris- Determines the height of the first focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the second focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the second focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Focus 2 Size Characteris- Determines the height of the second focal point of an
tics ellipse.
Circular Pitch Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative
tics pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness
for a feature with rotational pattern or polar pattern
offset (➤Circular Pitch characteristic [⇨ 5‑96]).
Linear Pitch Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative
tics pitch error, pitch error for a feature with pattern
(➤Linear Pitch characteristic [⇨ 5‑99]).
Minimum Size Characteris- Determines the minimum of multiple characteristics.
tics
DIN ISO 1101 Location Char- Determines the coaxiality of the axis of a feature (e.g.
Coaxiality acteristics of a cylinder) relative to another feature.
Cumulative Ax- Location Char- Determines the total error of a feature's paths in the
ial Runout acteristics direction of the reference axis.
Angle between Location Char- Determines the angle between two features. You
Features acteristics have a choice of results: acute angle, this angle's sup-
plement to 180° and the supplementary angles of
both to 360°.
Generated characteristics
CALYPSO generates the following characteristics automatically:
NOTICE
The Perpendicular construction is only useful as geometrical feature
for this characteristic.
This characteristic cannot be used to check the length of a measured
rotationally symmetrical feature, e.g. a cylinder or cone. The length of
such a feature is always the same as the nominal value.
For this reason, it cannot be used to check the distance between two
bores by means of a 3D line. You must use the Distance characteristic
to check the distance between two points.
Calculation modes
You have the following options for calculation:
– (LP) Two point distance dimension
The circle is fitted into a Gaussian element (LSQ feature). For each
point of each scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined. The
smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
a = min
b = max
a b
Gaussian element
– (E) Envelope condition
The envelope condition (size definition according to ISO 8015) allows
you to check whether both the tangential element and all two point
distances comply with the tolerance.
With an outside feature, the circumscribed feature is evaluated and
with an inside feature the inscribed feature. For each point of each
scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined.
The two point distances are used to determine the smallest distance
(A) for a circumscribed feature and the largest distance (B) for an in-
scribed feature. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
A B
u
The smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
For the angle and angle range you may enter formulas.
Calculation of point fac- As there is generally no point-symmetrical equivalent to a point, CALYPSO
ing each other interpolates between the two closest points.
If the angle between the two nearest points facing a given point is too
big, CALYPSO assumes a gap between the scanning paths and does not
calculate any two point distance dimension.
Definition of the angle The angle positions for the evaluation range and the result definition refer
position to the u axis of the feature's local feature alignment. The axis vector of
the feature determines the direction of the w axis.
The local feature alignment is displayed in the CAD window when open-
ing the feature.
Result output
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines up to two results which
are distinguished by min. and max. designations. Each individual result is
output as an individual characteristic and contains the following defini-
tions:
– the designation (e.g. 2 Point Diameter1(2)^Max)
– the feature
– the position of the corresponding extreme value as an angle (if the
extended position output is activated in the Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics)
– the mode used to calculate the 2 point diameter (not required in the
compact printout)
In the DMIS printout, the 2 point diameter is output as a normal diameter.
getMinActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMinActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint
– Access to maximum and maximum angle:
getMaxActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMaxActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint
Enter the name of the characteristic without the “^Min” or “^Max” suf-
fix. You can access results with indexes by means of the loop index.
Profile characteristic
Menu: Form and Location ® Profile
NOTICE
The Profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.
Direction of deviations The deviations between the actual surface and the nominal surface are
required for the determination of the “Profile” characteristic. It is as-
sumed that the values increase in outward direction (away from the ma-
terial) and decrease in inward direction. Depending on whether you use
an inside or an outside feature, the calculated result may be vice versa for
CALYPSO. Therefore, CALYPSO first calculates the difference between
the actual and nominal points and reverses the sign, if necessary.
Further considerations are based on the assumption that the deviations
increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in
inward direction (towards the material).
Shapes of zone When defining the Profile, you can choose from eight shapes of zone:
For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input field
is activated for the Tolerance (one side) where you additionally spec-
ify the side to which the tolerance applies using the Inside / Outside
Switch icon.
Result of profile The result of the profile depends on the selected shape of zone.
Calculation of deviations The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a math-
for the general surface ematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be evalu-
ated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its associated
nominal point. The stylus touch point is calculated based on the stylus
center, stylus radius and the normal vector of the nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and actual
point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation per-
pendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is ignored. This cor-
responds to the procedure for the space point.
The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used as
a measure for the profile.
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to the profile:
– No restrictions may be set for the best fit.
– Negative tolerances are not permitted.
Particularities for the The following particularities apply to the profile of a general surface:
general surface – No filters or outlier elimination.
– Only the Gauss (LSQ feature) evaluation method is possible.
Profile with reference As in general, the following applies to profile with reference features:
features Either no reference feature – or all three reference features are defined.
Otherwise, no result will be output.
The free form surface is the only exception: Individual reference features
are permitted in this case.
NOTICE
Starting from version 4.4, the definition of reference features for the
“GDT Symmetry” characteristic is changed and extended. This change
does not apply to older measurement plans; they are still calculated ac-
cording to the previous algorithm.
Tolerances The shape of zone determines the direction - referenced to the datum
reference frame - in which the deviation is calculated. Only one-dimen-
sional shapes of zone are possible (Only X, Only Y, Only Z). The list is
further limited depending on the feature type. If a cylinder is the feature,
you cannot select the direction parallel to the axis. The shape of zone for
a plane can only be evaluated in one direction.
The “GDT Symmetry” characteristic enables the definition of a projected
tolerance zone. If the feature is a circle or a cylinder, it can be evaluated
by means of MMC/LMC.
Result calculation
You can enter a coordinate system instead of reference features. The
procedure is the same as for the “True Position” characteristic.
A temporary coordinate system is formed from the reference features.
The primary, secondary and tertiary constraints of the coordinate system
are defined according to the sequence, direction and feature type of the
references.
CALYPSO determines the datum reference frame (from reference fea-
tures or as a coordinate system). The distance to the characteristic is
measured based on the origin of the coordinate system. The direction of
the measurement is predefined by the shape of zone: If the shape of zone
is Only X, evaluation takes place in the X axis of the datum reference
frame. The distance corresponds to the actual value. The actual value is
compared with the nominal value (the nominal value is always zero). The
value of the tolerance determines whether the characteristic is inside or
outside of the tolerance.
Feature as part of the da- A special feature of the “GDT Symmetry” characteristic is that the feature
tum reference frame may become a part of the datum reference frame. If the datum reference
frame is formed based on the three reference features and the primary
or secondary alignment is still free, CALYPSO tries to use the feature for
the determination of the coordinate system. If the direction of the feature
corresponds to the free alignment of the coordinate system, the feature
is entered.
The reason for this is as follows: One of the applications of a “GDT Sym-
metry” is a plane as a feature and an axis as a reference feature. Here the
X, Y origins and the spatial alignment are defined by the axis. However,
the plane alignment is still free. Thus the result of the symmetry would
not be clearly defined, as the feature (the plane) can still be freely rotated
about the axis of the reference feature. By integrating the plane in the
coordinate system, the plane rotation is no longer free.
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
– With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maxi-
mum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp), radial runout (Fr), roundness (Fre) and pitch error (fu) are shown
0,0000 0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
50 : 1 50 : 1
mm mm
1,0000
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
-1,0000
-1,0000
1 mm 1 mm
10 : 1 10 : 1
mm mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
0,1 mm 0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000 100 : 1 50 : 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
mm
0,0000 mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt. 0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
-0,5000
-1,0000
-1,0000
0,5 mm -2,0000 1 mm
20 : 1 10 : 1
mm mm
0,0200
0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
0,0000
-0,0100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
-0,0200
-0,0200 10 µm 20 µm
1000 : 1 500 : 1
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the charac-
teristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Circular pitch1(3)^Fp).
In the case of individual pitch error, pitch error and cumulative pitch error,
pitch spread and table, the name of the characteristic type is followed by
the unit of measure (arc length or angle) for the results.
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for the result (example: Cylinder1(3)-(4)).
The standardized reference sizes for individual and cumulative pitch errors
are shown in the errors of those results. The nominal and actual values
correspond to the angular pitch p or cumulative angular pitch pk.
– After the individual results of the circular pitch, all results of the se-
lected evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the de-
fault printout.
– The compact printout shows the results of the circular pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness spec-
ification factors are highlighted in color in the table.
– In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
Extended Pitch Task By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and his-
togram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
– With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maxi-
mum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp) and pitch error (fu) are shown in the printout. Furthermore, the
deviations are compared with the upper and lower tolerance.
– With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the value for Fp is shown
as difference between the maximum and minimum value. The range
between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band
without reference to a nominal value. All single values of the pitch
error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The toler-
ance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The indi-
vidual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.
The illustration shows the differences in the evaluation:
0,0000 0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
50 : 1 50 : 1
mm mm
1,0000
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
-1,0000
-1,0000
1 mm 1 mm
10 : 1 10 : 1
mm mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
0,1 mm 0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000 100 : 1 50 : 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Pkt.
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the charac-
teristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Linear pitch1(3)^Fp).
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for this result (example: Point1(3)-(4)).
The nominal and actual values correspond to the pitch distance p or cu-
mulative pitch distance pk.
– After the individual results of the linear pitch, all results of the selected
evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default
printout. A comment can be output together with the table.
– The compact printout shows the results of the linear pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error and pitch error specification factors are high-
lighted in color in the table. A comment can be output together with
the table.
– In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
Extended Pitch Task By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and his-
togram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.
NOTICE
The Minimum and Maximum characteristics are not exported to DMIS
and are not output in the DMIS report.
Display in CAD window In the case of display with banner, the arrow points to the feature with
the maximum or minimum in the graphic window (in contrast, the arrow
at the Average characteristic points to the first characteristic in the list).
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang cannot be determined for cylinder and cone. Fea-
tures created by constructions have no result since they do not have any
measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of the part segment (indicated as partial angle φ0) and
their degree of overlap (in %).
r
Overlapping 0%
1 2 3 4 ...
Overlapping 25%
1 2 3 4 5 ...
The measured values received from the roundness check of the part seg-
ments can be evaluated in different ways:
– Every roundness based on own partial circle
For each part segment, an own partial circle is calculated from its
points and the difference between the maximum and minimum dis-
tance of the actual points of the segment to the fitted partial circle is
specified.
– Every roundness based on overall circle
For each part segment, the difference between the maximum and
minimum distance of the actual points of the part segments to the
fitted part segment of the circle is specified.
The “Circumscribed and Inscribed” and “Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature” evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range
could be too small for this.
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang can only be evaluated according to Gauss (LSQ fea-
ture) or Minimum. The standard evaluation method is “Minimum”.
The “Circumscribed and Inscribed” and “Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature” evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range could
be too small for this.
This provides you with a measure for the roundness of each part segment.
For output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
NOTICE
Features created by constructions have no result since they do not have
any measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of sections (the reference length) and their degree of
overlap.
z
Overlapping 0%
1 2 3 4 ...
Overlapping 25%
1 2 3 4 5 ...
The measured values received from the straightness check of the sections
can be evaluated in different ways:
– Every straightness based on own partial length
For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted partial length
is specified.
– Every straightness based on overall length
For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted total 2D line
is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the straightness of each section. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
– the maximum straightness,
– all straightnesses that exceed the given tolerance,
– all straightnesses.
NOTICE
In contrast to Straightness of a 2D line, the shape of zone of the Straight-
ness Ref cannot be switched over. The deviation is calculated in the prob-
ing direction – this corresponds to the “normal” shape of zone in the
case of Straightness.
A straightness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional
Straightness. Minimum and maximum of the tolerance zone with the
greatest straightness are shown in the plot with “*”.
The CNC run will only continue after entering a number and confirming
with OK. When clicking Cancel, the CNC run is interrupted and the stop
light will turn red.
Tolerances If the unit of measure length is set, it is possible to enter the tolerance
class (ISO286) instead of the upper/lower tolerance.
To do so, select the desired special program, transfer in the list the re-
quired features and the associated coordinate system.
Creating an alignment Click Create Alignment in the definition template to insert a new
alignment in the measurement plan below the special program. Its name
is composed of the name of the Special Program characteristic preceded
by “WP_”. The corresponding Special Program characteristic is entered
as a feature.
During the measurement plan run, this alignment is calculated by means
of the values transferred by the special program.
Use Execute Program Now to start the entered special program from
within the definition template.
Select OK to confirm your entries and close the window.
Characteristic
Characteristic
Data of the
features
Special program
Special program
characteristic
Results
Characteristic
During the measurement plan run, the selected special program is exe-
cuted based on the entries made and the results are returned to CALYP-
SO.
Maximum Waviness
Tolerance Curve
Tolerance steps
Upper Limit [ °]
Add Delete
Feature
CircTopBALe
Actual at
OK Reset
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle,
Circle on Cone or 2D Line).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as num-
ber of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the permissible lower limit value of the range to be checked.
8 Define the tolerance steps in the table.
CALYPSO makes sure that the limit values in the table are arranged in
a monotonically ascending order (or in the case of oscillation length in
a monotonically descending order).
Note: You can also determine the tolerance value with a formula. The
numeric result of the formula calculation is assigned to the µm or
1/1000 inch unit and evaluated.
Note: The designations “lower limit” and “upper limit” refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-
gle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order.
• Add new ranges with Add.
• Enter the upper limit of the range and the tolerance which is
valid from the previous limit to the current limit.
9 If needed, activate Double Amplitude (PeakToValley).
10Press OK to confirm.
Note: If you want to define tolerance steps in several “Maximum Wav-
iness” characteristics:
• Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or -
• Copy the “tolerance” property of an already completed character-
istic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (➤Copying
properties of characteristics [⇨ 5‑36]).
Maximum Waviness
Tolerance Curve
Single values from file
Feature
CircTopBALe
Actual at
OK Reset
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle,
Circle on Cone or 2D Line).
The default setting for Evaluation type is Fourier.
5 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as num-
ber of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
6 Enter the path and the file name of the tolerance file under Down-
load tolerance curve from file. Here you can also enter a for-
mula.
- or -
Click the Select file for tolerance curve import icon and select
the file in the file selection dialog.
Maximum Waviness1
Tolerance Curve
Polynomial function
Upper limit
Lower limit
Feature
CircTopBALe
Actual at
OK Reset
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle,
Circle on Cone or 2D Line).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as num-
ber of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
The displayed formula is adjusted. If the ai and bi coefficient sequences
are identical, the corresponding formula computes the number of
harmonics and once the oscillation length.
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
Note: The designations “lower limit” and “upper limit” refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-
Maximum Waviness
Tolerance Curve
RTA Curve!
Upper limit
Lower limit
[mm]
Feature
CircTopBALe
Actual at
OK Reset
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle,
Circle on Cone or 2D Line).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as num-
ber of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
Note: The designations “lower limit” and “upper limit” refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-
gle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order for the limit values.
8 If the desired data record is not available in the RTA parameter file:
Select the file and enter the required values.
9 Select the suitable parameter record.
By closing and opening again the definition template, the correct val-
ues for the feature are entered.
10Enter the parameter R.
11If needed, activate Double Amplitude (PeakToValley).
12Press OK to confirm.
NOTICE
If parameters are missing for certain features, these cannot be selected
as a feature.
The following shows an example of such a text file:
name n0_outerCircle k_outerCircle n0_innerCircle k_innerCircle n0_plane k_plane n0_line k_line
Deep groove ball 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Angular ball 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Four-point ball 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Taper roller 1.2 1.0 1.0 1.0
Plane1 0.0 1.0
Line2 1.1 0.0
– The first line may have any column header. If the first character of the
file is not a number, the entire first line is ignored.
– The first column shows the limit values [UPR] of the tolerated range
as consecutive natural numbers. Missing or double values in the first
column lead to an error.
– The second column shows a tolerance in µm for each value in the first
column. The decimal separator is the point.
– Other units are not allowed; if a different unit is defined in the default
settings, the values will be converted.
Example The following shows an example of such a text file:
Upper limit value [UPR] Tolerance [µm]
12 2.2
13 1.0
14 0.7
15 2.2
Form plot for tolerance steps Form plot with tolerance polynomial
Structure of the form The structure of the form plot is similar to the structure of the Fourier
plot analysis of the roundness. It consists of the graphic with the amplitudes
per frequency and the appropriate value tables.
The unit of the X axis and the left column in the value table depends on
the setting in the characteristic: scale in harmonic waves (without unit) or
in oscillation length (angular unit of the measurement plan).
Special aspects with Additionally, the following applies to the maximum waviness form plot:
maximum waviness – The tolerance steps or the tolerance polynomial is drawn in the graph-
ic (in blue by default). Only those frequencies that lie within the fre-
quency range will be shown. The X axis is also scaled to this width.
Frequencies that are outside of the tolerance are shown in red by
default; frequencies that are inside of the tolerance are shown in
green.
– The frequency with the largest deviation is set in boldface in the value
table. The values in the table are also highlighted in color.
Selection of table values Usually, there is not enough space in the table of the frequencies with
amplitudes to show all values. Therefore, only a selection of the largest
amplitudes will be output.
– All frequencies whose amplitudes are outside of the tolerance have
priority, especially frequencies with the largest deviations.
– If then there is still enough space in the table, all frequencies which
are inside of the tolerance are listed weighted according to the devi-
ation values.
– Gauss Best Fit (LSQ feature). With this method, outliers have only a
minimal influence. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
– Minimum Best Fit (Chebyshov - Minimum Feature). Outliers have a
significant effect on the result when this method is used. Limitations
due to reference features are not taken into consideration. Optimum
setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.
– Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values into
tolerance. Possible movement and rotation ranges are limited due to
the reference features. This corresponds to a good/bad evaluation of
a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of the single devi-
ations.
– Best fit according to least absolute value feature (L1 feature). Outliers
have less effect with this method than is the case with the Gauss (LSQ
feature) method. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
Evaluation method The evaluation method for the features used to calculate the best fit of
bore pattern can be changed in the multiple selection dialog box for fea-
tures.
The “Outer Tangential Element” evaluation method is set by default.
Some results may not be reproducible, because this method is very sus-
ceptible to outliers. Better reproducibility can be achieved using the “LSQ
feature” evaluation method.
Filter and outlier elimina- In addition to the evaluation method, you can select filtering and outlier
tion elimination for the selected features.
Shape Of Zone For the shape of zone, you can select between rectangular and circular
tolerance zone.
Characteristic returns:
x Origin in x of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
y Origin in y of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
z Origin in z of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
NOTICE
These functions can also be used for any other coordinate system.
You can thus access the x, y and z origin of the best fit of bore pattern in
the definition template of any feature by entering a formula. This also
allows you to use constructions (e.g. recall) on the bore pattern.
6 Click the features you need for best fit of bore pattern (Select Fea-
tures).
- and/or -
Use the Select Bore Pattern selection list to include bore patterns
(i.e. feature groups) defined beforehand.
7 Select the Shape Of Zone and enter the tolerances.
8 In the case of a parameterized pattern, define here whether you want
to cancel the pattern or whether you want to include it together with
the parameter in the best fit of bore pattern.
In the first case, you will receive several lines with the individual pattern
features, in the other case, you will receive one line with one parame-
terized pattern.
Note: In the multiple selection window for features, you can change
the evaluation method for the features (default: “Outer Tangential
Element”) and set filtering and outlier elimination.
Note: All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the references selected
beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian or
polar form.
Note: You can parameterize the tolerances. You can enter formulas
and nominal values via the context menu.
9 Select a best-fit method from the Best Fit Method group:
• Select the best-fit method of your choice from the selection list.
Utilities
Overview of the utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and under Resources ® Utilit-
ies in the menu, you can find some special elements that are not char-
acteristics. However, they are required for the measurement plan run:
Utility Description
Alignment ➤Utilities for alignments [⇨ 5‑129]
Alignment from Sever- In the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
al Curves Software option under Coordinate system from best fit align-
ment of several curves
Probing system qualifi- ➤ Probing System Qualification utility [⇨ 5‑130]
cation
Utility Description
Graphics Element ➤Graphics Element utility [⇨ 5‑137]
Generated utilities
Further utilities are not added to the measurement plan via the menu but
generated automatically by CALYPSO and added to the list of character-
istics.
Utility Description
Presentation (Graphic- Outputs the CAD view of the corresponding point set as graph-
Point Set) ic on screen or printer.
Will be added to the measurement plan by activating Graph-
ics in the definition template of the Point Set additional fea-
ture.
➤Evaluating a point set [⇨ 4‑90]
You also obtain the same definition templates, extended by some func-
tions, if you create a new base/start alignment under Prerequisites (for
the start alignment, use the default method only).
For details on the determination of alignments, see ➤Creating a new
base/start alignment [⇨ 3‑24] and ➤Alternative alignment meth-
ods [⇨ 3‑49].
Here you can define the stylus system holder qualification settings.
The erosion module provides a file with translation and rotation values
for two related alignments which is suitable for erosion machines.
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being used
along with the name and directory of the file that will be created.
NOTICE
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
These alignments refer to the clamping device on the one hand and to
the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the alignment of the workpiece
or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined on the basis of
the alignment of the clamping device (X, Y, Z).
NOTICE
Here you cannot select alignments with index that are based on referen-
ces with pattern.
NOTICE
If you specify the alignments in an order that is the wrong way around,
you receive other compensation values.
When measuring the feature, the alignments will be formed and the pa-
rameter file of the erosion module will be saved.
Procedure First, your inputs and the manufacturer-specific entries in the Conf.dat
configuration file are used to create an Erodier.Edm parameter file as an
ASCII file.
NOTICE
By editing the ➤Conf.dat configuration file [⇨ 5‑134], you can control
the output of the file for the erosion machine.
Result Once the erosion module has been executed, an ASCII file will be available
that can be used with the erosion machine.
;MachName<serial_number> = <machine_name>
<machine-specific_switch>
The 8 digits of the switch (counted from the left) have the following
functions:
Digit Function
1 1 changes sign of X
2 1 changes sign of Y
3 1 changes sign of Z
4 1 changes sign of C
5 1 changes the datum reference frames
6 Manufacturer-dependent
7 Not used
8 Code electrode/tool; e.g.:
0 = ELEKEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
1 = WKSEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
A 1 in the 5th digit thus has the same effect as swapping the alignments
of the clamping device and the erosion electrode.
Text output In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be output
in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the custom printout
and the compact printout).
Only the text itself is output in the default printout and compact printout.
The custom printout also includes the name of the feature (e.g. “Tex-
telement7”).
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and not
when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the case
of characteristics).
Defining the graphics el- In addition to the form and locations plots in the characteristics, the
ement graphics element offers another possibility to output results in graphic
form.
You must define the form (layout) and the contents of the graphic to be
output. Various default layouts are available.
Use the icons to define whether the graphic is to be displayed and output
to the printer during the CNC run.
Saving an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the file
name and select the alignment to be saved. If the alignment has a pattern,
you must determine the desired index.
When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment (calcu-
lated from the actual values) is saved in the <user directory>\workarea
\basesystems directory. A subdirectory is created with the name that was
entered in the definition template. Use backslashes “\” to create further
subdirectories.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be calculated
during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for the
utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Loading an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the file
name for the alignment to be loaded. If the alignment has a pattern, you
must determine the desired index.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (e.g. because
a feature refers to this alignment), the alignment is loaded from the <user
directory>\workarea\basesystems directory.
If the file name contains backslashes “\”, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it will
be treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file name)
appears in the geometry datum reference frame lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values when
loading.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Special aspects The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the file
name.
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded (be-
cause the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this will appear
in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls such as the nominal align-
ment for the nominal geometry.
Deleting an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems
directory.
If the file name contains backslashes “\”, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectory.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the CNC
run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file is
write-protected, an error message will appear. The CNC run is resumed.
The Base Alignment Match utility makes it possible to obtain again a valid
coordinate system after changing the position of the measuring system.
Use Resources ® Utilities ® Base Alignment Match to add it to
the measurement plan.
Principle For the base alignment match, CALYPSO measures a number of features
once in the “old” position and once in the “new” position.
– At the “old” position (prior to changing the position), it is possible for
CALYPSO measure the selected features automatically during the
CNC run.
– After changing the position, CALYPSO does not recognize the loca-
tions of the features. Therefore, you must probe these features man-
ually. This corresponds to the manual probing of the base alignment
at the beginning of the CNC run with unknown position of the work-
piece in the CMM measuring range.
NOTICE
For the base alignment match, it is irrelevant whether the position of the
measuring system or workpiece has been changed, the procedure is the
same for both applications.
CALYPSO uses the coordinates of the feature datum targets to carry out
an internal 3D best fit. The resulting coordinate system becomes the new
internal base alignment in the CNC run.
The new base alignment is saved under the name of the base alignment
match in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems directory. During
the automatic run, the file name is assigned the “(CNC)” extension.
Bundle Alignment If your mobile measuring system has the corresponding equipment, you
can also use the more accurate Bundle Alignment trigonometric method.
CALYPSO is familiar with this calculation method.
Changing the position It is possible to change the position of the mobile measuring system sev-
several times eral times and use an additional base alignment match for this. This will
enable you to measure also larger workpieces with the corresponding
precision.
Run according to list of The CNC run differs depending on whether the measurement according
characteristics to list of features or list of characteristics method is used. When using run
according to list of characteristics, the base alignment match is performed
as soon as the feature is to be measured. No preparations are required
for the run according to list of characteristics.
Run according to list of The run according to list of features is performed differently. To enable
features CALYPSO to carry out the run according to list of features, each feature
must “know” to which base alignment it is assigned.
Therefore, you must add the “Base Alignment Match” utility to the meas-
urement plan and go to the Measurement Plan Editor Features to
define for each feature the position from which it is to be measured.
Warning limit You can enter and define a warning limit for the standard deviation so
that CALYPSO stops as soon as the limit is exceeded during the meas-
urement. It is possible to repeat the measurement or to cancel the run.
Printout The results of the manually measured features in the new base alignment
are saved in the default printout. The base alignment match is output in
the printout in much the same way as a 3D best fit.
Bundle Alignment
Select Features
Feature
OK Reset
5 Click Select Features and add the features for the base alignment
match.
Alternatively, It is also possible to select the features in the CAD view,
extract them or probe them on the machine while the definition tem-
The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.
NOTICE
You can use the Windows Explorer to save or to delete measurement
plans.
Measurement plan in the CALYPSO creates a separate folder with the name of the measurement
file system plan for each measurement plan in the <user directory>\workarea\in-
spections directory. All subfolders and files in this folder belong to the
measurement plan.
NOTICE
It is also possible to copy measurement plan directories and files using
the Windows Explorer.
System Set Up
File Menus
Optics
Dialog For Measurement Plan Change
Font
Switch off AutoSave for this measurement plan
Dynalog
Backup Copies Directory Printer
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPS Dialogs
Export DMIS
Interval Time in Minutes
Default Name
Strategies
No. of Versions Save
PCM
OK Cancel Apply
Outlier Elimination
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
2 Select the stylus names to be exchanged in the list and assign the de-
sired new name in the to selection field.
3 Click Execute Now! to apply the exchange.
NOTICE
Once you have selected features in the corresponding list of measure-
ment plan features, these are also highlighted after opening the meas-
urement plan editor.
Structure of the editors The structure of both editors is identical. This illustration shows an ex-
ample of the measurement plan editor for features.
Stylus system
Units
Set To
Selection list Manual Point Masking
Type Value
of defaults MAN CNC Mode
Cylinder CP +Z
Setup Mode Plane CP -Y
Printer Point CP +Z
Plane CP +Z
CMM Parameters
OK Cancel Help
NOTICE
With settings that cannot be referenced to the feature, the list of features
is empty.
Original order
Alphabetic order
Search...
Customize...
Customize view
You extend the table of a measurement plan editor by additional col-
umns. These columns are only used for displaying the value and not for
editing.
Use Customize in the table menu to open the Customize view dialog
box.
Customize view
Edit
Displayed columns
Comment
Inside/Outside
Alignment
X
Y
Z
NX
NY
NZ
W1
W2
Inclination Angle
Display always
OK Cancel
Here you select the additional columns to be displayed in the table. The
order of the additional columns is preset.
If the window of the measurement plan editor becomes too small to dis-
play all additional columns, the preset columns Name, Type and Val-
ue will be fixed and a scrollbar displayed.
Selected line List of settings Edit line for multiple Table with all features and the
selection corresponding attributes
Edit modes There are two edit modes available for the table. To switch between the
two modes, use F2 or select/deselect the Edit line entry in the context
menu.
– Individual mode
Carry out the changes directly in the individual lines.
– Multiple mode (editing several lines at the same time)
Highlight the desired lines. Carry out the changes in the upper edit
line.
Measurement plan edi- The Measurement Plan Editor Features makes it possible to show
tor features and hide the characteristics of a feature (if available) in the lines under-
neath by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way
as the other lines.
The Change to geometry entry in the context menu is active if you
selected exactly a line with a feature. By selecting Change to geome-
try, the line in which the feature which is used as the characteristic is
entered is selected.
Measurement plan edi- The Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics makes it possible
tor characteristics to show and hide the references of a characteristic in the lines underneath
by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way as the
other lines.
Additional information about the dialog boxes of the two windows can
be found under Measurement plan editor features and Measurement
plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Travel
Probing
Stylus system
Units
Show formulas Set To
Manual Point Masking
Type Value
MAN CNC Mode
Cylinder
Setup Mode Plane
Printer Point
Plane
CMM Parameters
Plane
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)
Cylinder
Geometry (Nominal Data) Inside/Outside
Plane
Warning Limits Alignment Plane
Optical Settings X Circle
CircTopFroLe Y Circle
CircTopFroRi Circle
Z
CylFroCe Cylinder
NX
CylFroRiDow Cylinder
NY
CylFroRe Cylinder
CylRiCe NZ Cylinder
CircRi W1 Circle
CircRiTop W2 Circle
2-D LineBack Inclination Angle 2D Line
PlaFroTop Plane
Rotation Angle
ConeTopCe Cone
Start Angle
Cone Addition1 Circle
Angle Range
PlaRe Plane
PlaBack Diameter Plane
Diameter Two
Length
This is where you can modify each individual value, but you cannot make
any modifications that are effective throughout the measurement plan.
If you select Show formulas, no numerical values will be displayed but
only the formulas defined in the features. You can modify the formulas.
Reflector
diameter
Workpiece
Offset 1
CALYPSO has to use the valid offset in the correct direction for the eval-
uation of the measuring results.
CALYPSO handles the reflector tools as a special stylus. Therefore, CA-
LYPSO does not perform any stylus radius correction but adds a tool-
dependent offset, the reflector tool offset, or the reflector radius to
the measured coordinates.
The Offset 1 and Offset 2 applying to the corresponding reflector tool
must be entered in the stylus system management when creating the
stylus.
The offset to be used for the feature type is set by default in CALYPSO.
You can display this setting in the Measurement Plan Editor Fea-
tures. This is where you can set the desired offset for feature types as
well as for individual features of the measurement plan:
Value Meaning
Standard The default tool offset for the feature.
No Offset No tool offset. Instead, the reflector radius is used.
Value Meaning
Offset 1 Tool Offset1 for the stylus radius correction.
Offset 2 Tool Offset2 used for the stylus radius correction.
You have two options for point masking which may also be combined:
– Point masking after time interval: You define the travel time
in seconds at the beginning and the end of the scanning process. The
points measured during this period are masked. In the default set-
tings, you can transfer the values 0.25 sec and 0 sec to the input fields
using the Default button. These are values which are generally used
in practice.
– Point masking according to the number: You define the
number of points to be masked at the beginning and the end of the
scanning path.
NOTICE
If you combine both masking options, all points which fulfill at least one
of the two conditions are masked.
Example The following table shows the result of the point masking when both
options are combined:
Masked Points
after time interval 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
according to the number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
(2, 4)
points used 05 06 07 08 09
Effect The masked points are treated in the same way as points which are out-
side the evaluation range. They can be displayed in the form plot and in
the CAD window, but are not used for the evaluation of the feature. The
masked points are also not counted in the number of points (printout).
Input Effect
** Proposal Accept for measurement plan: Number of decimal places in the default set-
tings
Accept for selected features: Number of decimal places in the higher-order
element (group or measurement plan)
0 to 6 Fixed number of decimal places
-1 Automatic mode 1: the tolerance width (the difference between the upper and
lower tolerance) determines the number of decimal places:
Tolerance width > 1 results in 1 decimal place
Tolerance width < 1 results in 2 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.1 results in 3 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.01 results in 4 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.001 results in 5 decimal places
-2 Automatic mode 2: the effective decimal places of the tolerances and the nominal
value determine the number of decimal places of the output:
The highest value of the effective decimal places (decimal places without filled
zeros) of the tolerances and the nominal value increased by 1 determines the
number of decimal places for the output of the characteristic.
Example 1: Nominal value = 235.0500
Upper tolerance = 0.1000
Lower tolerance = -0.1000
Number of decimal places = max (2,1,1) + 1 = 3
Example 2:
Nominal value = 21.4500
Maximum dimension = 21.455
Minimum dimension = 21.445
Number of decimal places = max (2,3,3) + 1 = 4
All features of the “Circle” type receive the names “Table_Bore_x” where
“x” is assigned a sequential number beginning with “1”.
The columns have the following meanings:
Column Meaning
Symbol The internal name used by CALYPSO for the corresponding feature,
e.g. “circle” for the Circle feature.
An overview of all the internal names can be found under ➤File with
default name: Internal feature names [⇨ 6‑20] in the Online Help.
Comment Any comment that, for example, explains the allocation of a feature
to the default name.
Name1 Partial names out of which the default name is composed.
... One of these columns must contain the start value for the index.
Name5
IndexColumn The number of the column that contains the start value for the index.
Value range from 3 (Name1) to 7 (Name5).
When the first character in the specified column is not a number, the
start value “0” is used.
If still other characters follow in the specified column of a number,
they will be ignored.
Example: “42_Circle_2” designates “42” as start value, “Circle” des-
ignates “0” as start value.
Individual default names can be defined for the following features of the
measurement plan:
NOTICE
Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contained parameters or patterns, they would have to be re-entered after
mirroring.
Formulas can also not be adapted automatically. If you mirror a meas-
urement plan with formulas, you must check the formulas in the mirrored
measurement plan with regard to correctness and correct them if nec-
essary.
In this case, you can interrupt the process and see in the Features
with Formulas window which features contain formulas in order
to check and adapt them if necessary. To access the function again,
select Plan ® Advanced ® Mirror Measurement Plan.
3 Use Yes to proceed with the mirroring of the measurement plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
NOTICE
If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal-arm CMM
with two measuring columns, you should, if possible, use the same fea-
tures for alignment (definition of the base alignment).
To combine measurement plans, you must create a “master measure-
ment plan” on a CMM designated for the purpose, and import the meas-
urement plans from other CMMs into this master.
All nominal values, actual values and tolerances are imported into the
master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within a single measurement plan incorporated into the
master: In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a feature
or characteristic is preceded by the name of the original measurement
plan, with a point as separator.
Example: Two features of the same name, “Cylinder1”, from the
measurement plans “Testblock1” and “Base” are named “Test-
block1.Cylinder1” and “Base.Cylinder1” in the master measurement
plan.
5 Edit the master measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics
and add constructions of features across individual measurement
plans.
6 Save the master measurement plan.
Note: When saved in the file system, the “$” will be removed from
the name. To make it easier to distinguish the master measurement
plans from “regular” ones, you should save them in a separate direc-
tory.
NOTICE
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement plan
open on the Calypso user desk.
Selection Operation
one feature Click the icon
several features Hold down the CTRL key and click icons
several connected features Click the first feature, press and hold down the SHIFT KEY and click the
last feature
4 Click the new position in the list and then select Paste Contents in
the context menu.
The Paste Contents... window is opened.
5 Tick the check box for the desired details and confirm with OK.
The new features will be pasted into the list at the position you se-
lected. The copies of the corresponding characteristics and datums are
pasted to the corresponding tab.
If you “copy with references”, you can use features and entire parts of
your measurement plan in another measurement plan without losing the
connections and references of the features.
1 Highlight in the corresponding measurement plan list the features you
want to copy with references.
2 Select Copy with References in the context menu.
3 Open the measurement plan into which you want to paste the fea-
tures, open the desired list of features or characteristics and select
Paste with References in the context menu.
You will see the list of selected features which are currently to be
pasted.
4 Define the type of pasting into the measurement plan using OK just
in case names are identical.
The features will be pasted into the measurement plan with a new
name if necessary.
The copied features and references are then stored in the measurement
plan lists:
Once you have selected a feature, the copied features will be pasted. The
corresponding characteristics and alignments will be added to the end of
the measurement plan page.
Once you have selected a characteristic, the copied characteristics and
alignments will then be pasted. The corresponding features will be added
to the end of the feature page.
If no feature has been selected, the copied features will be added to the
end of their corresponding list.
Styli and travel path settings (e.g. retract distance, clearance distance and
speed) are generally transferred from the original measurement plan.
However, if this data in the initial measurement plan originated from the
measurement plan-specific predefinitions, the values will adopt new val-
ues after pasting according to the predefinitions of the measurement plan
in which the feature has been pasted.
Formula input
By entering formulas you can
– calculate function values of measurement results (sin, cos...)
– use operators to link measurement results with constants
– use operators to interlink multiple measurement results.
NOTICE
The decimal separator in formulas is the point. The comma is used ex-
clusively as separator.
NOTICE
If you enter a formula for an angle, the calculated value is read as a radian
measure. However, the corresponding value in degrees is shown in the
input field.
If the result of the formula you entered is, for example, 90, the field for
the angle shows the value -63.3798 (degrees). To ensure that the input
field for the angle shows 90, you must enter the corresponding radian
measure in the formula.
If the expression does not produce a radian measure but a value in de-
grees, you must therefore add “*pi/180” to it or use the rad function for
it: “rad(value in degrees)”. Thus, the radian measure is calculated by the
formula and the input field for the angle shows the exact calculated nu-
merical value in degrees.
Entering formulas
Various input fields allow you to enter formulas instead of absolute values
and to make the value used dependent on other values or measuring
results.
Defining formulas
1 Select Formula in the context menu of the input field.
2 Enter the formula in the Formula window:
CALYPSO helps you when viewing the syntaxes for formulas:
• Function opens a list of all operators, functions and commands
as well as of all available parameters.
Double-click a feature to transfer it to the formula input field.
• Loop inserts a loop variable in the formula.
• Double-click an attribute to insert the return value of the charac-
teristic or feature into the formula.
• Compute shows the formula's return value for test purposes.
3 Press OK to confirm.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which
you called the formula input. Note that the color of this field has changed
to yellow.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.
2 Use the buttons to open and close the branches that interest you.
Under the feature, the formulas used in it are shown.
Setting conditions
Processing conditions
You can link the computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
CALYPSO to execute a “jump” in the CNC run in accordance with the
measuring results and not to measure the corresponding characteristic.
NOTICE
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you understand
the following.
You can choose whether to have the condition queried before or after
the characteristic is computed. CALYPSO ascertains whether the condi-
tion is fulfilled or not.
If the condition is queried before computation, CALYPSO either computes
the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to
compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the fol-
lowing:
2 Select Formula in the context menu of the yellow input field and
enter the condition (see ➤Entering formulas [⇨ 6‑38]).
Note: The only possible return values for the condition are “true” and
“false”. Use the comparison operators.
3 Enter additional settings for the condition:
• Only with the PCM Technology option: Use Settings to enter the
presettings and postsettings.
• Tick the Post condition check box if the condition is not queried
until the characteristic has been computed.
• Yes button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is true (satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
• No button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic meas-
uring run.
Inserting loops
Processing loops
NOTICE
This section is intended for advanced users who are familiar with the
basics of programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or sim-
ilar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you configure the
base alignment.
If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement plan,
the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several times in suc-
cession.
NOTICE
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output parameters.
1D Linear Pattern
1D Linear Pattern1
Rotation Angle
Exclude Indexes
Projection Plane
W2 Y/Z
5 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value for Real
number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting from the
loop placed around the characteristic.
6 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
7 Click OK to close the feature template.
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measuring run
(see ➤Running a measurement plan [⇨ 7‑2]).
NOTICE
By saving external batch files with the corresponding names in the gen-
eral directory for measurement plans, you change the run of all meas-
urement plans on the system without having changed the measurement
plans.
NOTICE
If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the
same way. For more information, please refer to Run control with external
PCM files in the operating instructions for the PCM Technology option.
Advantages of macros
Recurring measuring Macros make it easier for you to create and handle recurring measuring
jobs jobs:
– You can measure several identical components in assemblies (e.g.
valve seats in an engine block).
– You can measure multiple features, i.e. features with recurring but
varying fundamental quantities (e.g. stepped cylinders, stepped pyr-
amids, rows of holes with increasing radius).
– You can program measuring jobs that are repeated on different work-
pieces.
Distributed preparation This also facilitates distributed preparation of measurement plans by sev-
of measurement plans eral employees.
Information In an info file, you can include for each macro information about its func-
tion or parameters or also a technical drawing.
NOTICE
This behavior is in contrast to the usual behavior of CALYPSO: The coor-
dinates of a feature are converted as soon as another coordinate system
is used to ensure that the actual positions of the features do not change.
NOTICE
When updating a macro, the assigned coordinate system is retained.
Permissible coordinate The selection of coordinate systems for the macro depends on the macro.
systems The following coordinate systems are excluded:
– all coordinate systems which are defined in the macro
– all coordinate systems to which references to any feature of the macro
are assigned
Creating a macro
To create a macro, first create a “normal” measurement plan and then
save it as a macro.
If the measurement plan contains variable values, these must be assigned
initial values.
1 Open the measurement plan you wish to use as a macro.
2 Select File ® Macro ® Define Macro Parameters and edit the
list of macro parameters:
• Create a list of all variable values in the measurement plan. To do
so, click Automatic.
• Enter a default value for each parameter.
3 Save the measurement plan as a macro.
• Select File ® Macro ® Save Measurement Plan as Mac-
ro to save the macro with the name of the open measurement plan.
• Select File ® Macro ® Save Measurement Plan as Macro
as... to save the macro under any name.
NOTICE
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed.
Updating a macro
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed. If you have made
changes to a macro and want these changes to work in a measurement
plan in which the macro has already been integrated, you will therefore
have to update the macro.
What happens during the macro update?
– If you have set Accept settings from macro when updating
macro to On under Macro in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features, all changes of the macro measurement plans are trans-
ferred to the macros integrated in the current measurement plan.
– If you have set Accept settings from macro when updating
macro to Off under Macro in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features, the settings such as styli, RT position and warning limits
which may have been modified in the measurement plan will not be
overwritten.
Toolboxes
What are toolboxes?
A toolbox contains icons for certain measurement plan features and thus
simplifies the structure of a measurement plan: You can easily insert icons
into a measurement plan.
You create custom toolboxes. To do so, select those measurement plan
features that you require most frequently.
The master toolbox includes all features, characteristics and utilities
as well as the super characteristics added and selected by you.
NOTICE
You cannot change a toolbox subsequently. You can only delete it and
start it again from scratch.
Creating toolboxes
You create a toolbox in the master toolbox.
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and select the “master toolbox” in
the Tool Box Selector window.
The Tool Box Builder window appears on the screen.
3 Now you can assemble your elements: Click and hold the left mouse
button on the desired toolbox button and drag it over to the right
column.
You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox.
4 To delete an item, select Delete from the context menu of the item.
5 Select File ® Save to save the toolbox.
NOTICE
As soon as you click anywhere else on the work area, the toolbox is hid-
den. To display it permanently, activate the View ® Always on top
menu item.
Deleting a toolbox
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and open the Tool Box Builder
window.
2 Select File ® Delete.
3 In the list of custom toolboxes, click the toolbox you wish to highlight,
then click OK.
Super characteristics
NOTICE
It is not possible to measure super characteristics on horizontal-arm
CMMs (HAM). This function is also not suitable for measurements with
optical sensors.
Purpose of the function Super characteristics allow you to measure workpieces or parts of work-
pieces of a certain shape. CALYPSO recognizes the dimensions and other
parameters via probing and thus determines the nominals in the features.
Any existing nominals in the macro are ignored.
The nominal geometry of the new feature is derived from the computed
feature and rounded with the rounding measure defined in the default
settings.
It is thus possible to use a generally defined feature for measurements on
objects with different dimensions.
Example For example, you have prepared a measurement plan macro which is in-
tended for the measurement of the distance between two circles. You
define a super characteristic from this macro. By dragging this super
characteristic to the measurement plan area, the measurement plan starts
immediately and probings are performed. Then the nominals are deter-
mined in the measurement plan via the probings and from the dimensions
of the probed workpiece.
Next time, the dimensions can be completely different.
What is applied? The characteristics, the features and the alignments are adopted from the
macro. Constructions and recalls are computed from the measured con-
struction elements.
Compared with the simple automatic feature recognition, it is possible to
predefine general characteristics for features that still have to be meas-
ured.
What is not applied? The measurement strategies and all strategies are not applied. A strategy
point is created for each probing performed in the manual run.
The currently selected stylus represents the stylus entered in the newly
created feature.
If you change the stylus configuration during the measurement and use
it for probing, a new clearance group is added of which the stylus con-
figuration corresponds to the selected stylus.
Characteristics which contain nominals are recomputed once the neces-
sary features have been measured.
Unsuitable features The following features cannot be measured as a super characteristic:
– Free form surface - CAD models are not adopted from the macro.
– Points with the Space Point or Net Point space point mode – the
determined point must be projected on the nominal for the compu-
tation of the computed feature.
2 Select the super characteristics you wish to remove from the Tool Box
Builder and click OK.
The super characteristics are removed.
NOTICE
By removing a super characteristic from the Tool Box Builder, only the
link to the macro is removed. The macro itself remains unchanged.
Run sequence
During probing, the list of features is processed in succession. If an align-
ment is necessary, it will be determined according to the definition in the
list of characteristics. Then the run for the features will continue.
Sphere Point.
General Curve The projection plane cannot be determined via the automatic feature
recognition and must be checked.
Patterns If the macro contains features with pattern, CALYPSO measures the first
feature of the pattern and applies the pattern as defined. You must check
whether the pattern of the macro fits the new measurement plan.
Projection planes If a feature in the macro contains a projection plane, the projection plan
will be applied. A firmly defined projection plan (e.g. XY plane) will be
applied even if you measure the circle in the YZ plane.
Theoretical features Theoretical features must be checked as these features are directly adopt-
ed from the macro.
Formulas Formulas are adopted from the macro. It is in particular important to
check the formulas if the nominal position is computed with a formula
which uses getActual or getNominal.
Clearance groups Once the feature has been generated, the clearance group will be com-
puted. Since CALYPSO cannot compute the correct clearance group in
individual cases, you must check the clearance groups of the new features
subsequently.
– The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance planes are de-
fined (see ➤Defining the clearance planes [⇨ 3‑56]). The normals of
the clearance planes bear designations corresponding to the direc-
tions of the coordinate axes (positive or negative), referenced to the
base alignment of the workpiece.
Retract planes
Certain geometric conditions require a retract plane for the clearance
group. The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
CP+Z
Retract plane
SCP+Z2
There is no guarantee that the run will be collision-free if you fail to check
the defaults.
NOTICE
Other travel paths might be generated, depending on the characteristics
selected or if the run takes place without a result reset.
– Perform the first CNC run at reduced speed.
– If routing turns out to be poor, click Help in the Start Measure-
ment window and proceed in accordance with the instructions.
NOTICE
Consider edge blocking: It could be a help (see ➤Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [⇨ 3‑61]).
You can influence the travel paths between features. You can find more
details under:
X
Measuring
volume
Outer
clearance Clearance
planes planes
You can define additional travel paths in clearance groups and a park
position. All additional paths and positions can be defined and edited in
a similar way using the strategy window for paths.
The following example shows a strategy for the approach to a park po-
sition in an upper corner of the CMM:
Path selection
Path to holder
Path to holder
Path to holder
Enabled Parameter
OK Reset
Settings
Path definition before stylus system change
Font size
Font size
OK Cancel Help
4 Enter the PCM commands for the path before and after stylus system
change.
5 You can easily enter the PCM commands and parameters using the
context menu.
Menu item ... inserts / opens ...
PCM Functions ® Path selection setNavigationPath("toProbeChange", )
setNavigationPath("fromProbeChange", )
PCM Functions ® Stylus system getProbe().confName
PCM Functions ® Rack Assignment getRackAssignment()
Feature Selection ® Path List for selecting a path
Feature Selection ® Stylus system List for selecting a stylus system
Feature Selection ® Rack Assignment List for selecting a rack assignment
Feature Selection ® Characteristics List for selecting a characteristic
Feature Selection ® Features List for selecting a feature
Feature Selection ® Printout header data List for selecting a printout header date
setNavigationPath("fromProbeChange" , "" )
endif
NOTICE
In case of fixed path selection, the CMM also travel the paths to and from
the holder during a manual change in the measuring run. In this case, it
may be necessary to manually change the stylus system at an unfavorable
CMM position. You may even have to step on to the measuring plate.
To avoid this, you can leave the CMM in the proximity of the workpiece
by means of the isManProbeChange query, thus facilitating stylus system
change. You only have to ensure after manual removal of the stylus sys-
tem that the next stylus system to be changed automatically can be ap-
proached without collision as no path is used in this case.
getActualSide
Supplies the current clearance plane. The syntax is:
getActualSide()
getCNCMode
Supplies the travel mode of the CMM: "manual" or "cnc". The syntax is:
getCNCMode()
getNextStylusSystemName
Supplies the next required stylus system for stylus system change. The
syntax is:
getNextStylusSystemName()
getPositionCMM
Supplies the current position of the probe in machine coordinates as the
result. The syntax is:
getPositionCMM()
Example: starting_point=getPositionCMM() assigns the “start-
ing_point” variable the value 0.005443d@20.345677d@200.311123d.
getProbe
Returns stylus properties. The syntax is:
getProbe("stylus_name","plate_name").characteristic
Stylus name and plate name must be strings enclosed in straight quotes
("). The possible values of “characteristic” are: “radius” or “probeName”.
The current stylus name can be omitted.
Examples:
getRackAssignment
Supplies the active rack assignment. The syntax is:
getRackAssignment()
getRecordHead
Returns the current value of a printout header variable. The syntax is:
getRecordHead("printout header variable")
If the value of the printout header variable is intended for further use as
a file name, the getRecHdForFil command must be used.
For a complete list of all printout header variables, please refer to the
operating instructions for the base module under ➤Reference: Printout
header data [⇨ 8‑37].
isManProbeChange
Query for manual stylus system change. The syntax is:
isManProbeChange()
Supplies TRUE if manual stylus system change is performed and FALSE in
the opposite case.
setNavigationPath
Sets the path from or to the transfer point of the stylus system changer.
The syntax is:
setNavigationPath(direction,path name)
The value for “direction” is either "fromProbeChange" or "toProbe-
Change". For “path name”, a valid name of a previously defined path
must result.
If “path name” does not supply a valid path name, CALYPSO will auto-
matically determine the path.
NOTICE
If you have the appropriate programs on your computer, you can view
files of the following formats: *.txt, *.rtf, *.doc, *. bmp, *.avi, *.flc, *.pdf
and *.gra.
The information is saved in a file. A measurement plan can be assigned
its own file for user information.
You can create video files on any PC with a video grabber board and a
video camera.
NOTICE
Files created using Microsoft Word (*.doc) should be saved in Word in
the “Rich Text Format” (RTF), and subsequently this file (*.rtf) should be
used. This has the advantage that the document is opened as write-pro-
tected with the CZViewer.
You can view the added information in the Start Measurement dialog
box by clicking User Information.
NOTICE
You can also include an existing measurement plan group in a higher-
order measurement plan group and create a hierarchy.
The functions available for measurement plan groups are as follows:
– Edit ® Form group combines all marked measurement plan fea-
tures in a group.
– A double click on the icon of the group displays or hides the features
of the group.
– Edit ® Undo group undoes an existing group.
NOTICE
A mini-plan is assigned a unique name. The name is not shown in the list
of characteristics.
Creating mini-plans
There are three ways of creating mini-plans:
– Combining single characteristics
Highlight the desired characteristics and select Plan ® Mini-
Plan ® Define.
– Creating a mini-plan for each selected measurement plan group (see
in the Online Help under Create a Characteristic for each Feature se-
lected)
– Creating a mini-plan for each measurement plan group of a certain
hierarchical area. The naming of the mini-plans corresponds to the
Starting a measurement
CNC run and manual run
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process
modes:
– CNC run
The CMM is under the fully automatic control of CALYPSO. A pre-
requisite is that the CMM installed is CNC-capable. If you have acti-
vated the setup mode for a feature, the CNC run will be interrupted
before the feature and you can define further parameters in the strat-
egy of the feature. This is particularly suitable for optical measure-
ments where light and camera settings have to be adjusted.
Note: CALYPSO checks the licenses during the operations. If a license
violation occurs during the CNC run, the run will be interrupted to
avoid data loss. CALYPSO displays a warning message to inform you
about the interruption. You can exit CALYPSO or recheck the license
after elimination of the cause.
Note: Usually, CALYPSO cancels the CNC run if no probing takes place
along the probing search path. This can be avoided by activating
➤Continue at missing probing [⇨ 7‑11].
– Manual run
In a manual run, CALYPSO only manages the measurement plan and
tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many probings
to take. As well as probing the features, you also control the CMM.
Both modes of measurement are started from the Start Measure-
ment dialog box. This is where you set the options for the measurement
plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains the parameters
you use to
– define the scope of measurement,
– set the parameters for the printout, and
– define the settings for the CMM.
NOTICE
You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start
Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Online Help.
NOTICE
If you have activated the Setup Mode for certain features in the Meas-
urement Plan Editor Features, the CNC run will be interrupted at
these positions. The feature's strategy opens and you can make settings.
The CNC run will only be continued after you have confirmed the settings.
This is particularly suitable for optical measurements where light and
camera settings have to be adjusted.
Group Settings
Selection – Base Alignment
– Current Alignment
– Current Selection
Result – Print plots
– Clear existing results
CMM – Order of the run: From Characteristic List.
– Movement between the features: Automatic.
– Run Mode: Normal
– Speed in mm/s: Maximum speed
Manual run
5 Tick the Custom printout check box if you want the system to
generate a custom printout.
6 Click OK to start the measurement plan.
CALYPSO steps you through the process: This is done via the Manual
Alignment dialog box.
NOTICE
The “Continue at missing probing” function does not work for the fol-
lowing measurement methods:
- Scanning
- Self-centering probing
- Space point normal measurement
- Curves and free form surfaces
NOTICE
To do so, you need the PCM Technology option.
NOTICE
The message “No result: Not enough points” normally displayed if a
probing is missing and in the message window is not displayed in case of
getActual(FeatureName).elementIsMissing - unless the feature is called
as a feature by a characteristic.
NOTICE
Do not close the Stop Light window, because if you do CALYPSO will lose
contact with the CMM.
However, you can always minimize the Stop Light window or put it be-
hind another window. You can display the Stop Light window perma-
nently in the foreground.
The illustration below shows the Stop Light window:
– Position Display Extension (displays also the rotary table angle and the
A and B angles)
– Separate Coordinate Display (displays the coordinates in a separate
window)
– Probing On/Off
If you want to move the views in the Stop Light window, click the Move
Elements icon and position the views as you wish. To exit the movement
mode, click an unoccupied part of the window.
To save the arrangement of views, click the Save view, size and po-
sition icon.
Additional windows
Via the More menu, you can open the following windows in the Stop
Light window:
– Taskbar
To call other ZEISS programs
– Status Monitor
To display and log all routine procedures of CALYPSO
– Joy Stick
Call of the CZ Control Panel Extension which allows you to lock
the joystick of any axis (see ➤Locking the axes of the joy-
stick [⇨ 7‑18])
– Show RT loading (only for RT-AB)
Shows the center of mass of the workpiece on the rotary table
(➤Visualizing the loading of the RT-AB rotary table [⇨ 12‑38])
– Configure changer (only for DuraMax)
To display the stylus system changer for the DuraMax and activate the
changer protection
1 Click red in the Stop Light window or press the ESC key on the control
console (not in case of Dynalog P!).
The CMM immediately cancels the measurement.
You have to click green before you can start a measurement plan again.
Interrupting a run
Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill, but
can continue at some subsequent point in time.
1 In the Stop Light window, click the yellow light.
The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes.
2 To continue the run: Click green.
- or -
To stop the run for good: Click red.
Button Function
Continue Run The run is resumed (corresponds to a click on
green).
End Run and Save Data The measurement of the current feature is com-
pleted.
Printout and data storage are performed as
specified. In a run after measured features, all
computable characteristics are automatically
output.
End Run without Saving Data The run of the current characteristic and the
corresponding features is completed.
When using the run sequence of features, only
the current feature is processed.
The CMM is moved to a clearance position.
Printout and data storage are not carried out.
NOTICE
If you are interested in this function, contact the Carl Zeiss sales depart-
ment.
Call Depending on the settings, the remark window opens during the CNC
run or, if necessary, afterwards. The window is based on the measure-
ment plan and is saved together with the corresponding measurement
plan.
You can always open it in the corresponding measurement plan after the
measurement using View ® Information on run. The Informa-
tion list will then show the problems and events that occurred during
the last CNC run if the list has not been reset before closing the meas-
urement plan.
marks and suggestions for solving the problem are provided in the De-
scription text field below.
By clicking one of the entries in the Features concerned list, the cor-
responding feature in the measurement plan area is selected and by click-
ing Open or double-clicking, the corresponding feature is opened.
Here, you can make the changes according to the help information in the
Description field.
When you have analyzed and solved the problems that occurred, click
Reset. Thus, all remarks in the list are deleted and the window is closed.
NOTICE
The Clear existing results setting in the Start Measurement win-
dow also resets the remark list.
Status after cancellation If the run was canceled by an error (collision or technical fault) or by
yourself (by activating the red stop light, Escape or Emergency-Stop), the
Information list shows the last feature or characteristic measured prior
to the cancellation. You can thus find out at which point the measure-
ment plan was interrupted. This is particularly useful for large measure-
ment plans with long measurement duration to determine the measure-
ment plan progress and to find out at which point in the measurement
plan the fault occurred.
Printouts If the corresponding setting is made, the run-related remarks are sum-
marized in the custom printout and compact printout.
Repeating measurements
Use of repeat measurements
Repeat measurements are performed to avoid the transmission of meas-
uring errors to the statistics system. Measuring errors are, for example,
caused by soiled workpieces. In this case, the entire workpiece must be
measured again.
CALYPSO makes it possible to remeasure individual “critical characteris-
tics” of a workpiece and to combine the new measuring results with the
already correctly measured results.
Repeat measurements are also suitable for the automatic measurement
of several similar workpieces, for example on a pallet. Repeat measure-
ments can also be performed at a later stage. With the aid of the part
number, CALYPSO remembers which parts still cause measuring errors.
The settings for a repeat measurement are stored in the measurement
plan. You will be informed as soon as measuring errors occur. You can
then interactively control the type and number of repeat measurements
and decide which measuring results are to be accepted and which not.
Critical characteristics
During a repeat measurement, CALYPSO measures all features and ref-
erences of the activated characteristics. The already measured uncritical
values are combined with the values of the repeat measurement. The
values are then saved in a QDAS file and transferred to the statistics pro-
gram.
Critical characteristics If “critical characteristics” are output by CALYPSO upon completion of a
measurement plan run, this may be due to measuring errors. The follow-
ing characteristics are critical characteristics:
– Characteristics that could not be calculated
– Characteristics the feature references of which are not defined com-
pletely
– Characteristics the features of which cause errors during the calcula-
tion
– All characteristics that are out of tolerance and that are possibly lim-
ited by the “badElement Formula” function
Defining critical charac- If you want to limit the “critical characteristics” according to certain fac-
teristics yourself tors, you have to program a PCM function called badElementFormula.
Insert the criterion for the selection of the critical characteristics in this
PCM function.
display("----------------------------------")
// Define "badElementFormula"
defineFunctionStart("badElementFormula")
OBJECT_NAME=getFunctionObjectName()
VALUE_K2005=val(getCFAttribute(OBJECT_NAME,"u_k2005class"))
CONDITION_1=(VALUE_K2005>=2) OR (VALUE_K2005==9999)
CONDITION_2=not(getActual(OBJECT_NAME).inTolerance)
RETURN_VALUE=CONDITION_1 AND CONDITION_2
defineFunctionEnd("RETURN_VALUE")
The run is then identical to the run of a new series of repeat meas-
urements.
5 Tick the part numbers that are to be measured again in the Reset
part number window.
Parameter Meaning
Recheck = 0 Repeat measurement deactivated
Recheck = 1 Repeat measurement activated
Reset: = 0 No reset
Reset: = 1 Reset
Maximum The maximum number of repeat measurements of
0 means no limitation
Entering the PCM func- You have the following options for entering the PCM function:
tion – Entry in the presettings of the measurement plan
– Entry via an external PCM file
4 Check the workpiece for dirt or other reasons causing measuring er-
rors.
5 Start the repeat measurement by clicking OK in the Repeat Meas-
urement dialog.
The measurement plan run is performed again. If critical characteristics
still exist, the Select Characteristics for Repeat Measure-
ment dialog is opened.
NOTICE
It is not noted in the custom printout that the displayed measuring results
originate from a repeat measurement.
after the measurement. The context menu of the CAD window allows
you to display the masked points in red.
Remedy If for a feature the number of points used for the evaluation is consider-
ably smaller than the nominal number of points, CALYPSO has masked
certain measuring points due to insufficient or excessive measuring force.
For such features, you must correct the scanning speed or define more
precise specifications for the workpiece form or position, e.g. by means
of a discrete-point macro measurement.
Then repeat the measurement.
NOTICE
The remark window assists you in this and similar cases. It makes it pos-
sible to open and edit the features concerned quickly (➤Working with
the remark window [⇨ 7‑21]).
Manual measurements
Surface measurement with single points
You can define the coordinates of certain points by manual probing. To
do so, you must set the “Surface measurement with single points” mode.
Otherwise, CALYPSO attempts to recognize a feature from the probed
points.
Conditions:
– The CAD model for the workpiece is loaded.
1 Select Features ® Surface measurement with single
points.
CALYPSO switches to the “Surface measurement with single points”
mode. The Surface measurement with single points dialog
box is opened.
NOTICE
Only one software package may be active at a time.
Printouts in CALYPSO
Overview of the printouts in CALYPSO
There are single printouts and multiple printouts in CALYPSO.
– The default printout, the compact printout and the custom printout
belong to the single printouts.
– You can compile single printouts and individually created printouts as
desired in multiple printouts.
The results of form and location checks can be represented and output
graphically as a form plot or location plot or as a point list. You can also
output the CAD view as a plot.
You can configure CALYPSO so that printouts and plots or graphics are
output automatically on the screen, the printer or as a PDF file during the
CNC run.
If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in subse-
quent evaluation runs, you can use the export functionality of CALYPSO
that supports a number of mainstream formats.
Combined evaluations You can also combine several measurement plans and create combined
assessments (➤Combining several measurement plans [⇨ 6‑27]). The
measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on
the CMM – they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in
the network.
NOTICE
Most options are available in the Multiple Printouts mode as these
printouts include all types of single printouts.
Default printout The Default Printout is a log of all results obtained in measurement. You
can configure the representation to only a limited extent.
You can, for example, define in the Measurement Plan Editor Char-
acteristics that all formulas used in features and characteristics should
also be output before the corresponding element. Additionally, the as-
signments and PCM function calls of the presettings and postsettings of
the measurement plan and of all elements are also output. To do so, the
PCM option is not necessary.
If you want to output the deviations in the “Amount” mode, the corre-
sponding column has the heading “Dev. <->”. <->“.
Compact printout The Compact Printout is shorter than the default printout. It lists the
characteristics together with the measured features for quick assessment.
The contents and representation of the compact printout can be config-
ured.
Multiple printout A multiple printout is a combination of one or more single printouts and
individually created printouts.
Preparing printouts – You can define the basic structure and the layout of the custom print-
out and compact printout by means of the printout format editors
under Resources ® Design custom printout (➤Preparing cus-
tom printouts and compact printouts [⇨ 8‑21]).
– Special output features for individual characteristics can be defined
under Resources ® Characteristics Settings Editor (Meas-
urement plan editor characteristics).
– Select Resources ® Define printout to define the contents of
the three single printouts (➤Defining a printout (Single Printouts
mode) [⇨ 8‑8]).
Outputting printouts By default, CALYPSO creates a default printout during the measurement.
during the CNC run If under User Defined Pages the To Back check box is ticked, the
printout window is hidden.
After starting the CNC run, select other printouts such as the compact
printout and custom printout in the Result area in the Start Meas-
urement window. You define here whether the printouts are to be
printed or output as a postscript or PDF file.
NOTICE
To define which options can be selected or deselected in the Result area,
select Resources ® Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
Outputting printouts If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the cor-
again responding menu item in the View menu (➤Displaying and printing
printouts [⇨ 8‑13]).
Printouts
– Compact Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
– Custom Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
– Default Printout:
You can run the default printout in the background.
– Excel report:
Define the desired report type for output to Excel.
– Output to DMIS:
For the result output in DMIS format, you can select a dmi file for the
DMIS header.
Defining a printout
1 Select Resources ® Define printout.
The Format custom printout dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Define on the tabs the scope and sequence of the features in the
printout.
Note: If you also want to represent the grouping of characteristics in
the custom printout, set Group in Custom Printout to On in the
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
3 To define the DMIS header for result output in DMIS format (➤Ex-
porting measuring results into files [⇨ 8‑85]) related to the specific
measurement plan: Click Select DMIS header to select the desired
file.
Otherwise, a default printout header will be used.
4 To allow the measuring results to be output to an Excel file: click
Select EXCEL Report and select the required report type.
5 Press OK to confirm.
Note: The settings are only effective when the Multiple Printouts
function is not activated. By default, CALYPSO creates a default print-
out after each evaluation. You define any additional printouts to be
output in the Start Measurement window.
For more information, see Format custom printout in the CALYPSO dialog
reference in the Online Help.
Defining and managing You can define and manage your multiple printouts in the Definition
multiple printouts of Multiple Printouts dialog box:
You define here the single printouts and Basic Reports that should form
your multiple printouts. You can define the basic structure, layout, con-
tents, output media, output format, etc. for each printout (➤Creating
multiple printouts [⇨ 8‑10]).
Creating individual The PiWeb BasicReporter allows you to create individual printout
printout templates templates (Basic Reports) that can then be used in multiple printouts
(➤Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb BasicReport-
er [⇨ 9‑2]).
Outputting printouts After starting the CNC run, select the prepared multiple printout to be
during the CNC run output in the Result area in the Start Measurement window.
NOTICE
The options that should be selectable in the Result area can be defined
under Resources ® Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
Outputting printouts If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the cor-
again responding menu item in the View menu (➤Displaying and printing
printouts [⇨ 8‑13]).
1. Creating/selecting a multiple
printouts
2. Selecting characteristics and
printout header parameters
2 Click Create New Multiple Printout and enter the desired name.
- or -
3 Select the multiple printout to be edited from the list under Multiple
Printout.
4 To remove the results of certain characteristics from certain printout
features click Mark characteristics for hiding.
5 Select the characteristics that should all be hideable under the preset
Mark function in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteris-
tics.
You can then select the Hide option for each individual printout
feature for which the marked characteristics are to be hidden.
Note: You can define additional output features for individual char-
acteristics in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
window (see Measurement plan editor characteristics).
6 To define the selection of the printout header parameters that are to
be entered: Click Select printout header parameters for in-
put and select the desired printout header parameters for input at
CNC start and in the measurement plan.
7 Select under Printout Features the elements to be included in the
multiple printout and edit their structure.
- or -
NOTICE
You will find detailed information on all functions of the dialog box in
the Online Help under Definition of multiple printouts.
NOTICE
The file names of the measurement plans used must not contain any
special characters (based on DOS conventions) or blanks.
Own Excel reports Experienced MS Excel users can modify the existing report files and create
their own.
Icon Function
Show default printout
Examples of printouts
Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower tol-
erances, the printout contains further information:
– Icon of the characteristic:
– Red: Characteristic is out of tolerance
– Yellow: Characteristic is outside the defined warning limit (if de-
fined)
– Green: Characteristic is within tolerance
– Histogram: The vertical line in the histogram represents the middle of
the tolerance range. The dashes represent the tolerance usage. Each
dash represents 25% of the tolerance usage. The illustration below,
for example, represents 50% of the upper tolerance limit.
– Characteristic groups
– Additional, user-defined pages
– Printout header compact printout
NOTICE
You need some experience with drawing programs in order to use the
editor.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Info bar
Graphic
toolbox
Drawing area
Special toolbox
The functions of the printout format editor do not differ greatly from
those of conventional drawing programs. They are not described in detail
in the following.
The special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can
insert into the custom printout. These are filled either automatically by
CALYPSO while the measurement is in progress, or manually by the op-
erator. The special toolbox of the characteristics contains two tabs. On
one tab, you will find the characteristic attributes.
The graphic toolbox contains icons representing the usual graphics tools
for drawing simple graphics elements, and for inserting complete graphic
files (such as a company logo, for example) into the custom printout.
The info bar contains information on size of image, working directory and
current scaling.
The toolbar allows you to access a selection of commands for controlling
the printout format editor.
Printout header
data
The type and length of parameters or selection lists are defined in this
file.
You can also activate and edit this file. (➤INI file for printout header
data [⇨ 8‑30]).
NOTICE
If a variable defined in the userfields.ini file was already defined in the
userfields.txt file, the definitions in the userfields.ini file will overwrite
those from the userfields.txt file.
NOTICE
If an ➤INI file [⇨ 8‑30] called userfields.ini is present in addition to the
userfields.txt file, its settings will overwrite those of the userfields.txt file.
Supplementing file To define an additional input field, add one line with the following ele-
ments, separated by commas:
Element Meaning
Labels Will be used in the result file, must begin with
“u_”
Identifier Will be displayed in dialogs
Display control The field must be subsequently entered:
E = once only per measurement plan under Re-
sources ® Printout header parameters
R = for each measurement plan start in the Start
Measurement dialog box
RE = appears in both windows
Examples:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE
u_field2,FELD 2,R
u_field3,FELD 3,E
The newly defined fields have been added to the selection column of the
printout header fields.
Print Results The entered values will appear in the printout header of the custom print-
out and the compact printout.
The identifications (e.g. “u_field1”) and the appropriate values will be
output in the table file (*_hdr.txt).
<option> <value>
Mandatory for each input field
name = <pname> The name of the input field (is displayed in the
Input Parameters window to the left of the
input field or list)
editMode = true When you are editing the measurement plan
and a value for the field is to be entered (Re-
sources ® Printout header parameters
menu items)
false Otherwise
runMode = true When a value for the field is to be queried on
CNC start
false Otherwise
selectiveList = true For input via combo box or selection list
false Otherwise
Additionally mandatory for combo boxes and selection lists:
selectiveListValues = <aname> The name of the section with the entries of the
combo box or selection list
editable = true Combo box
false Selection list
Additionally possible as an option:
defaultValue = <dvalue> The value to be displayed before a selection is
made. Important: If the default value is to be an
entry from a list (combo box or selection list), it
is not the actual entry that should be here
(“<value>”), but its name (“<option>”) in the
list of the <aname> section.
type = A or a Alphanumeric values (character strings of let-
ters and numbers)
F or f Floating point numbers
I or iI3 or i3I5 Integer values (“integer”) with three, five or 10
or i5I10 or i10 digits.
The length must be entered separately in the
maxLength field.
maxLength = <dvalue> In the case of alphanumeric values: Length of
character string
In the case of floating point numbers: No effect
In the case of integer values: Number of bytes
required
<option> <value>
maximumValue = <value> The maximum permissible value for a numeric
parameter. Only together with minimumValue.
Precedes an indication for maxLength.
minimumValue = <value> The minimum permissible value for a numeric
parameter. Only together with maximumValue.
Precedes an indication for maxLength.
forbiddenAnywhere = "string" Characters which are not allowed in the char-
acter string. The forbiddenChars.txt file over-
writes this indication.
forbiddenFirst = "string" Characters which may not be the first character
in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt
file overwrites this indication.
forbiddenLast = "string" Characters which may not be the last character
in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt
file overwrites this indication.
Evaluation of the entries Each combo box and each selection list is assigned as a value of the
for lists selectiveListValues option the name of the section in which the indi-
vidual entries of the list appear line by line.
Each line in this section has the form <option>=<value>. The “options”
are entered in the protheadpara file; the assigned “values”, on the other
hand, are displayed in the relevant list.
NOTICE
This enables, for example, the entry of numerical values as UserIDs in the
protheadpara file for further processing, whereas the user names are
displayed in the Input Parameters window.
Then the user selects its user name but the UserID is entered in the pro-
theadpara file.
Input check If the type and maxLength entries are available, CALYPSO checks when
entering or changing the corresponding parameter whether the data type
and length are complied with and issues a message in case of non-com-
pliance.
If the type, maximumValue and minimumValue entries are available, CALYP-
SO checks when entering or changing the corresponding parameter
whether the data type and value range are complied with and issues a
message in case of non-compliance.
If the directory of the userfields.ini file contains a forbidden-
Chars.txt file, the entries of the latter are used to check the alphanumeric
inputs. If the section contains lines with forbiddenAnywhere, forbidden-
First or forbiddenLast, these indications overwrite those of the for-
biddenChars.txt file.
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
[u_field3_valueList]
REM this is the valuelist for the userfield named "Weekday"
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
4=Thursday
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
REM the following value list doesn't need special keys for the values. So the keys are the
REM same as the values.
[u_field5_valueList]
Euro=Euro
Dollar=Dollar
Yen=Yen
Franc=Franc
DM=DM
• In the drawing area, click the position where you want to insert the
object.
4 Save the template:
• Select File ® Format and enter the desired format.
• Select File ® Save As and save the template under a new name.
You can program a custom printout in such a way that before the printout
is printed, the user is prompted by CALYPSO to enter certain items of
information destined for inclusion in the printout. You do this with the
aid of the variables in the printout header (➤Reference: Printout header
data [⇨ 8‑37]) and the Inquire query function in the PCM language
(see PCM functions: Input and output in the operating instructions for
the PCM Technology option).
In this example, CALYPSO should prompt for the pallet number when the
measurement plan is started and include the number entered by the user
in the custom printout.
1 Select Resources ® Design custom printout ® Printout.
2 Select File ® Open and open the vphead.gra file.
The printout header is displayed.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the
Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you want
to position the field. Delete the word “Tool” from the label and type
“Pallet number” instead.
4 Close and save the printout header you edited.
5 Open the list of characteristics.
6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted and select Parame-
ter in the context menu.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Under Presettings, enter the following:
PALLET=inquire("Enter the pallet number: ")
setRecordHead("tooldf",PALLET)
Explanation: What is found in the “tooldf” variable is output into the
“pallet number” printout header field.
The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user is
prompted to enter the pallet number.
The effect of the second line is that the number entered in this way is
assigned to the “tooldf” variable and is thus subsequently printed in
the printout under “pallet number”.
Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan, which
means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
1 Printout header
2 Plots
3 Data table
Graphics forms with Exactly one graphics form is selected in each graphics element. This
printout header and data form defines the basic page layout, i.e. the page size and the page mar-
table gins as well as the printout header and footer with texts, images and
variables for the date and page number.
The graphics forms predefined for CALYPSO show all important table
values; in addition, the best fit forms contain the best fit result.
In the printout header editor, you can adapt the predefined graphics
forms to your requirements and create your own form pages (➤Creating
graphics forms with the printout header editor [⇨ 8‑67]).
Single templates for dia- In the definition template of the Graphics Element, you can define
grams which form and location checks are to be shown and how the results are
to be represented (➤Defining graphics elements [⇨ 8‑42]).
– Suitable diagrams are predefined as single templates for the repre-
sentation of form and location plots. If necessary, you can change
existing single templates and create new ones in the graphics editor
(➤Creating single templates with the graphics editor [⇨ 8‑60]).
– It is possible to include several diagrams for several characteristics in
a graphic.
– To improve the comparison of measuring results, it is possible to sum-
marize the measuring results of several characteristics of the same
type in one diagram (“Grouping characteristics”), e.g. several round-
ness checks.
Output of graphics Graphics can be displayed and output to the printer during the CNC run.
CALYPSO displays graphics in the Calypso Formplots window. This
window allows, e.g. printing and output as a PDF file as well as other
evaluation options (➤Working with the plot window [⇨ 8‑70]).
Line plot
Straightness
Line plot
Straightness Ref
Line plot
Flatness
See ➤Form plot for flatness [⇨ 8‑46]
Plane plot
Line plot
Flatness Ref
See ➤Form plot for flatness [⇨ 8‑46]
Plane plot
Pie chart
Cylindricity
See ➤Multiple circle form plot for cylindricity [⇨ 8‑47]
Cylinder plot
Line plot
My templates You can use the standard templates or create and name your own tem-
plates. The graphics editor allows you to create and edit your own tem-
plates (➤Creating single templates with the graphics editor [⇨ 8‑60]).
Adjusting a plot In this plot window, you can define additional settings for the represen-
tation and the scope of display (points, segments). (➤Working with the
plot window [⇨ 8‑70]).
NOTICE
The displayed graphics have been created by means of the default graph-
ics forms and single templates predefined in CALYPSO.
Mirroring measuring val- The single template allows you to determine whether the measuring val-
ues ues are to be mirrored. Thus, the deviations from the nominal values are
removed in the opposite direction: Positive deviations become negative
and negative deviations become positive.
Contents of the multiple The multiple circle form plot shows the individual circular sections with
circle form plot different radii in concentric form. If you do not wish the representation
with different radii, open the Define graphics output window and
activate Stack Multi Plots. The circles will then be plotted one upon
the other in the colors set.
Contents of the surface The surface line plot shows individual surface line section segments with
line plot magnified representation of the deviations.
The example shows a surface line plot with four surface lines. The surface
lines that are opposite to each other are represented in the same color:
Coloring surface lines In the basic settings, the surface lines in the plot are all displayed in the
same color.
Scale factor With the scale factor in the Data group you define the distance between
the represented surface lines.
Defining the position of The plots contain coordinate axes with mm scale. You can determine the
a deviation exact position of a deviation on the workpiece by using the rotary table
angle, the angle of the surface line and the determined height in the form
plot. The rotary table angle is stated in the data table in the Define
graphics output window.
Page 1 of 1 Zoom:
Contents of the straight- The straightness plot shows a magnified representation of the measured
ness plot points along the surface line.
Selecting segments To open the Segment window, click Segment Selection in the De-
fine graphics output window.
In the Segment window you define the segments to be represented.
The different segments have consecutive numbers in the Segment win-
dow. These numbers result from the order of the segments in the meas-
urement strategy.
Example: With the strategy you first measure a circular section and then
two surface lines. The following segments are displayed in the Segment
window:
Graphics output Use the Define graphics output window to define the representation
of the plot.
With Point distance fixed you define that the points in the plot are
represented with identical distances on the axis.
Selectable projection You can select the projection plane and its orientation for the represen-
plane tation of the curve form plot:
– Auto (automatic selection via the measuring data)
– X/Y
– Y/X
– X/Z
– Z/X
– Y/Z
– Z/Y
The first axis is the horizontal axis and the second axis is the vertical axis.
Scaling curve You can differently scale the representation of the curve in the X, Y and
Z direction.
Adjusting the plot Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window
where you can make additional settings for the representation and the
scope of display (points, segments).
Elements of the repre- The points projected onto the plane are shown on the location plot.
sentation – The nominal and actual positions of the bores are marked by crosses
which are connected by lines.
– Tolerances are represented with circles around the nominal positions.
– At each nominal position, the deviation of the actual value from the
nominal value and a designation are shown.
– The reference point is represented in the same way as the positions
of the bores.
You can define the type and color of the crosses as well as the labeling
and the font.
Best fit result The best fit result includes the data table. The magnification is shown
below the scale.
NOTICE
A curve plot shows the deviation between the nominal distance and the
actual distance in graphic form. It is not a representation of the actually
measured values and does not show the form of the workpiece.
The following applies to the standard template:
– The largest and the smallest deviation is identified by a red circle.
– The distance tolerances are shown as red lines.
The plot is scaled so that all nominal points of the curve are shown.
If the tolerance values are very high, they might not be visible in the
plot.
Line plot The line plot shows the difference between the actual distance and the
nominal distance for each measuring point based on the first measuring
point.
NOTICE
Please note that contact between or intersection of the curves is possible
in the case of magnified representation, although no real contact or in-
tersection takes place. To determine the actual curve distance, the rep-
resentation must not be magnified.
NOTICE
If the nominal curves are not identical or the magnification is very large,
the tolerance lines might not be completely visible in the plot.
The bend circles represent the curvature of the curve in the contact points.
They are drawn near the corresponding contact point.
You can set the following properties:
– second deviation curve with different magnification
– extreme points not marked
– type of auxiliary lines
Pitch plot
CALYPSO provides a pitch plot.
Contents of the pitch In the pitch plot, the pitch features activated in the measurement plan
plot are shown in the following order:
– Individual pitch
– Cumulative pitch
– Pitch error
– Radial runout
– Roundness
Use the Define graphics output window to define the representation
of the pitch plot.
The pitch plot shows the deviations as a bar located above and below the
X axis. The color of the bars is determined by the size of the deviation.
Colors of the bar Determine the colors using the Out Of Tolerance, Above Warn
Level, Above Suppression Level and Below Suppression Lev-
el properties.
The suppression level is indicated as an absolute value in mm or inch. The
warning limit is set as a percentage referenced to the tolerance limit.
Extreme points Use Extreme points visible to define that the largest positive and the
largest negative deviation is marked by small red triangles.
Coordinate axes You may use linear or logarithmic scaling for the Y axis; linear scaling must
always be used for the X axis. The color of the coordinate axes is deter-
mined by the Pen: Basegrid property. The color and the font of the
labeling of the axes is defined via Text: Font.
Limits The tolerance and warning limits are drawn in the plot. The color of the
lines are determined via the Pen: Tolerances and Pen: Warning lev-
el properties. If a property is not to be shown, you must set the corre-
sponding color to “transparent”.
Graphics editor
The graphics editor makes it possible to create and edit single templates
for form and location plots of a graphics element.
CALYPSO provides predefined single templates for all characteristics for
which you can create plots with the graphics element. If necessary, you
can adapt the predefined single templates to your requirements or create
new individual single templates.
NOTICE
A software update or a new installation overwrites the predefined single
templates. Save the copies of the modified single templates with a new
name so that your changes will not get lost when a software update is
carried out.
NOTICE
CALYPSO uses functions of PiWeb for the graphics editor. Only limited
functions are available in CALYPSO.
4 If the result is satisfactory, you can save your changes to the clipboard
by clicking Apply.
5 To start from the beginning, click the Reset button.
CALYPSO undoes all changes made since the last time the settings
were saved or saved to the clipboard.
Note: To maintain a clear structure of the property list, the graphics
editor shows by default only the most important properties of an ele-
ment. To display all properties, activate the Extended option in the
title bar.
2 In the Define graphics output dialog box, select the New... list
item in the Parameter / Any Input selection list.
The New Text / New Number input field is opened.
3 Enter a name in the Name input field.
4 Enter a value via the Value field or a formula via the context menu.
5 Select the format in the Format field.
You can select between Text, Integer, Scalar, Length, Angle and Tem-
perature.
6 Press OK to confirm.
Editing variables To edit an existing variable:
1 Select the variable in the menu of the Parameter / Any Input se-
lection list and click the Edit button.
2 Modify the value and the format in the Value Change <parame-
ter_name> window.
The yellow background color tells you that a formula is used and that the
Magnification Factor defined in the property window is ignored.
Using magnification To use the Magnification Factor defined in the property window:
1 Remove the check mark next to the Parameter / Any Input selec-
tion list.
NOTICE
The installation of a new version or a service pack overwrites the prede-
fined single templates (“default”). Save the copies of the modified single
templates with a new name so that your changes will not get lost when
a software update is carried out.
NOTICE
The changes of a single template are not automatically applied to graph-
ics in which the single template is also used. The changes only become
effective when you assign again the single template to the characteristic
in the graphics element.
NOTICE
CALYPSO uses functions of PiWeb for the printout header editor. Only
limited functions are available in CALYPSO.
Calling the printout Select Resources ® Design custom printout ® Printout Head-
header editor er Editor for Graphics Feature... to open the printout header editor.
Loading PTX files The type of a plot and its orientation are defined in a PTX file. To open a
file in the printout header editor, select File ® Open Report. The PTX
files are located in the <user directory>\protocol\formplott\PlotControl-
Files\templates directory.
Calling the master and At the left margin of the window, click the Pages button to open the
report page list of existing pages.
Master page The master page is used to ensure a uniform appearance for all pages of
your report. Elements of the master page are grayed out on all report
pages in the screen view.
NOTICE
All entries made on the master page become immediately active when
you quit the master page. To carry out additional modifications, call the
master page again.
The Properties tab allows you to deactivate the validity of the master
page for individual pages of the report. Untick the Use Master Page
check box.
Report page The plot is displayed on the report page. It is possible to add elements
such as pictures and texts to the report page. To insert blank report pages,
select Add ® Empty Page.
Features It is possible to insert and edit elements in the report. Select
Paste ® Element to insert an element in the report.
The following elements can be used for editing the printout header:
– Image
– Line
– Text
– Container
The elements can be edited either via the context menu or the Proper-
ties tab.
Properties tab The Properties tab allows you to show and define all properties of the
elements. The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the
status bar of the list.
Image elements To insert image elements, select Paste ® Element ® Image.
Text elements The context menu and the Properties tab allow you to insert variables
such as the current time or the current page number in each text element.
The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the status bar of
the Properties index card. A short description of the active property is
displayed in the lower field on the index card.
Assigning properties In the drawing area, you can activate elements by clicking them and de-
fine their properties via the Properties index card. The modifications
become immediately active and are displayed in the drawing area.
Assigning variables to It is possible to assign variables to each text element by means of the
text elements Properties index card. Click the button located next to the Text prop-
erty to open the Select variables dialog box.
Paging You can move between the pages of the graphic using the Navigate
menu.
Zoom The slider of the zoom at the top right corner of the toolbar allows you
to zoom the view of the plot in and out.
Adjusting the plot Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window. In
this window, you can define additional settings for the representation
and the scope of display (points, segments).
Info mode Click with the mouse in the info mode (Tools ® Info mode) to display
details on the individual points/segments. Information on the character-
istic, segment, upper and lower tolerance, deviation, angle and status is
displayed.
NOTICE
Measurement plans created with older versions of CALYPSO can also be
saved as a PTX file. The current measurement plans only allow the saving
as a PDF file.
Page information Select Tools ® Page Information to display the size of the paper and
the orientation used for the plot.
Graphic
Graphic outputs via You can also output form and location plots via the Graphics Ele-
Graphics Element ment utility. For more information, please see ➤Outputting form and
location plots with the graphics elements [⇨ 8‑40].
Location plots for char- Certain location plots are available for the following characteristics via the
acteristics definition template for the characteristic:
– Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Inclination
Line - Line
Line - Plane
Plane - Axis
Plane - Plane
– Runout
Radial runout of circles
Total radial runout of cylinders
Axial runout or total axial runout of planes
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you have
created yourself (“*.gra”) to display the deviations in graphical form.
CAD window as a plot You can also “freeze” the representation in the CAD window and output
it as a drawing with spatial effect in a plot (➤Outputting the CAD view
as a plot [⇨ 8‑78]).
Output types
You can manually call and output form or location plots or have them
displayed in the CNC run. In addition to that, you can use the Point List
to output a form plot in tabular form.
NOTICE
For details, see ➤Outputting a form and location plot manual-
ly [⇨ 8‑77].
Now ➤set the type of plot and the properties of the plot [⇨ 8‑76].
This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can now
display the form or location plots of other characteristics together with
the current form or location plot. Select the desired characteristic.
5 Press OK to confirm.
To change the printout header of the plot, open the Header Editor using
Resources ® Design custom printout ® Printout and open the
mbhead.gra file in the <user directory>\protocol\formplot\calypso direc-
tory.
Details on how to work with the “Printout format editor” can be found
under ➤Printout format editor [⇨ 8‑24].
NOTICE
The precondition for Fourier analysis is that a closed or overlapping cir-
cular path has been measured. In the Fourier analysis of straightness, the
measured line is treated as a closed path.
Viewing You can enter the number of harmonics to be shown. The maximum
number of harmonics that can be shown is equal to half of the measured
points.
The graphic automatically fits into the intended space. The scale of the X
axis is logarithmic and starts at 1 = first harmonic.
Calculation process To determine the values to be shown, all measured points are filtered first,
if necessary, and outliers are eliminated. Then, to calculate the various
amplitudes, a Fourier analysis is carried out, taking into account unequal
distances between the measured points.
In the Fourier analysis of flatness, the valid deviation is the deviation in
the direction of the normal with respect to the plane.
In this window, you can edit the representation of the form and location
plot and print the current representation.
Division of the window The window consists of three areas:
– The form plot header, containing the data of the printout header.
– The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along with
the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The two red
lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower tolerance limit.
You can see at a glance where a measured point deviates from spec-
ification, and in which direction.
– A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value, the
tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if used.
Marking extreme points You can mark extreme points. To do so, select Edit ® Plot Type in the
form plot window and tick the Extreme Points check box. You then
have a choice of different marking symbols.
Individual path and file You can ➤define individual paths and names [⇨ 8‑88] for the following
names data types:
– Printouts (default and compact printout)
– Table File (Characteristics, Features, Printout header)
– Measuring points
– Stylus Data
– PDF File (Graphics, Text, PTX graphics, BasicReporter, All)
– Q-DAS File
– Graphics PTX File
– DMIS File
– dml file
tive for all measurement plans, you must activate Name from set-
ting for all Measurement Plans.
You can only make the individual settings for the active measurement
plan if you do not tick this check box.
5 Enter the name of the output file with the appropriate extension in
the Name definition of output file in PCM Syntax (with or
without path) input field and confirm your entry by pressing the
Return key.
Note: If you do not enter any path, the path of the current measure-
ment plan is used.
Note: The name is entered in the Current Name output field. If the
name contains parameters (e.g. “part number”) to which no values
have been assigned, these parameters are not displayed.
Note: All file types, for which you defined an individual name, as well
as the names themselves, are shown in the All name definitions
deviating from default output field.
The defined names will be used for the selected output files.
NOTICE
If a file already exists under a name used for the output files, the file will
be overwritten with the new output file.
The default printout is created in addition under a default name (protocol)
irrespective of the name definition.
Result To File
AlMS
DMIS
PiWeb Configuration
PDF Files
Stylus data
Curve Points
2 Select the file types to be saved and initialize the merge file, if needed.
Note: Initialization deletes existing entries in the merge file.
Tick the Select at CNC Start check box if you want CALYPSO to
prompt for confirmation before saving.
3 Select the contents and, if necessary, the file type in which you want
to save the measuring results of the curve measurement.
4 Press OK to confirm.
You will find more information on this window under Results to File in
the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
NOTICE
The last settings made in the Export Points window will always be used
for the export. If points with other settings were exported manually prior
to the CNC run, then the settings made for this purpose apply. The fol-
lowing default settings apply as long as no settings have been made: text
file, actual values + normal vectors, base alignment, contact points.
2 Select the output format and the scope of output in the Export
Points window.
3 Define the alignment the coordinates should refer to as well as the
point type.
4 Select Export to start the export.
The points of the feature are written in the feature_name
+part_name file in the current measurement plan path.
NOTICE
The last settings made in the Export Points window will always be used
for the export. If a CNC run starts after the manual export, the points are
exported from the measurements with the settings defined for the man-
ual export.
Special aspects of nomi- If you have set the characteristics for the nominal data source, the nominal
nal values data in the characteristics will be assigned to the following nominal data
in DMIS:
lated values for the corresponding column and there is an “END” at the
end of the file.
– The *_hdr.txt header file contains the general data for the measure-
ment plan and the measurement.
– The *_chr.txt characteristic file contains all values defined and meas-
ured or calculated in the characteristics.
– The feature file contains all values (nominal and actual values) defined
and measured in the features.
The same identifiers as in the printout format editor are used for desig-
nation of the values.
Interface to DML The table files represent the interface to various other output formats,
e.g. also to the DML files.
In addition to the direct measuring results, the table files contain further
information:
– Names of the datums for all characteristics.
– Coordinate system of the True Position as a matrix and vector.
– Tolerance zone
Curve results The results of the curve measurement are output as table files if the
Curve Points check box is ticked in the Result To File window.
If the Masked curve points check box is ticked in addition, the table
file also includes the masked points which are not used for the evaluation.
These lines contain in each column the entry “99999” instead of the
measuring values.
Matrices and vectors are represented as a character string and use only
one column of the table. The components are lined up and separated by
the “@” separator:
Matrix A = a11@a12@a13@a21@a22@a23@a31@a32@a33
Vector v = v1@v2@v3
The coordinates of the vector refer to the base alignment.
The two coordinate systems are saved in lines which belong to a True
Position or best fit of bore pattern in the table file of characteristics
(*_chr.txt).
– The matrix of the coordinate system, based on the nominal features,
is saved in the “drfTransformNominalMatrix” column. Sein Vektor in
der Spalte „drfTransformNominalVector“.
– The matrix of the coordinate system, based on the actual features, is
saved in the “toleranceTransformActualMatrix” column. Its vector is
saved in the “toleranceTransformActualVector” column.
The vectors can be converted into inch but the matrixes not.
Tolerance zone of a True The tolerance zone of a True Position is entered in the “tolerancezone”
Position column. The tolerance zone may have the following values:
NOTICE
The columns for the coordinate systems and the tolerance zone are only
completed if the DML output has been activated for the CNC run.
NOTICE
The original coordinate designations (X, Y, Z) are retained in the “type”
(translated characteristic type) and “idsymbol” columns (language-neu-
tral characteristic type).
Instead of the automatically generated X and Y axis designations, you can
select any other designation and invert the order of the characteristics in
the table file.
NOTICE
The renaming and inversion take also place in the custom printout. The
two other printout types remain unchanged.
NOTICE
Custom printouts are not saved. Therefore, you cannot copy them.
NOTICE
This function is used to re-evaluate the data originating from the meas-
ured features. You cannot measure additional features. The constructions
and characteristics may only refer to the already measured features.
Procedure The subsequent evaluation procedure comprises the following steps:
Open and modify measurement plan Open and modify measurement plan
Load measuring points Load measuring points
Perform evaluation Perform evaluation
is automatically increased at the end of the CNC run is used when saving
the measuring points.
The measuring points of a part number are saved by default in a file
named <part_number>.zmp in the <user directory>\workarea\inspec-
tions\<measurement plan>\idmeaspoints directory.
The number of saved files relating to a measurement plan is limited by
the Limit setting (by default: 5 files). The oldest files will be overwritten
when the limit is exceeded.
NOTICE
If you modify the paths and names for the files containing the measuring
points via Resources ® Name for output files, this mechanism is
no longer effective. You must then ensure the unique assignment of the
measurement to the file.
Automatic saving You must set the automatic saving prior to the measurement in the Re-
sult To File dialog box which is opened via Resources ® Results to
File.
Manual saving If automatic saving is not activated, the measuring points can also be
saved manually after the measurement.
5 Set the desired evaluation parameters and start the subsequent eval-
uation.
CALYPSO runs the measurement plan in the same way as when meas-
uring with the CMM but without probing the workpiece. CALYPSO
uses the loaded measuring points for the calculation of the features
and characteristics.
NOTICE
Opening and closing of the communication interface, as well as launch-
ing of the external process, are performed by means of PCM commands.
You therefore must possess the PCM Technology option in order to ac-
cess the measuring results.
Programming languages The external process may be programmed in one of the following lan-
guages:
– VisualBasic
– VBA (VisualBasic for Applications)
– VisualBasicScript (WSH) [WSH = Windows Scripting Host]
Principle CALYPSO provides a DLL with the name CalypsoInterface.dll as the
interface. Using this interface, a “CalypsoInterface” object can be pro-
duced with the corresponding access methods.
This “CalypsoInterface” ActiveX component does not have an interface
of its own. It is installed together with CALYPSO and “waits” for its ap-
plication.
The “CalypsoInterface” with its properties and functions (➤Syntax of the
“CalypsoInterface” [⇨ 8‑106]) is used in the external process to access
the measuring results and data of the measurement plan.
Access procedure If all preconditions have been met, access to the measured values takes
place in three steps:
– CALYPSO opens a communication channel (socket) to the outside
world.
– CALYPSO starts the accessing external process and waits until it is
complete.
– CALYPSO closes the communication channel (socket) again.
CALYPSO adds three commands to the measurement plan for this
(➤Permitting access to measuring results [⇨ 8‑105]).
NOTICE
The examples for using the syntax refer to programming with VisualBa-
sicScript.
Construction of “CalypsoInterface”
The syntax for constructing the “CalypsoInterface” object is as follows:
CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Creates an interface object and returns an object of the type CalypsoIn-
terface.
NOTICE
It makes sense to create only a single instance of the CALYPSO object –
data exchange can take place through only one port of the server.
Example Set MyCalypso = CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Properties of “CalypsoInterface”
The “CalypsoInterface” object has the properties listed in the table below.
Property Function
HostName Specifies the host name of the server on which CALYPSO is running.
Example: Default: "localhost"
MyCalypso.HostName = If the client (VBS, VB or VBA program) is located on a different com-
"160.4.11.146" puter than that of CALYPSO, this property must be assigned the
computer name or the IP address of the server before the connection
is established.
TimeOutConnect Specifies the latest time after which a connection setup attempt with
Example: CALYPSO will be aborted.
MyCalypso.TimeOutCon- Default: 10 [seconds]
nect = 10
TimeOut Specifies the amount of time after which a timeout is to take place
Example: when waiting for a reply from CALYPSO.
Example: MyCalypso.Time- Default: 5 [seconds]
Out = 10
Port Port number of the socket via which CALYPSO awaits contact.
Example: Default: 9998
Example: MyCalypso.Port
= 9998
ErrNo Contains an error code. Meaning:
(Read access only) 0 No error
-1 Error when calling the implemented object functions
Returned value of the respective function:
“0” for numerical values
“False” for Boolean values
Empty character string for string values
If data exchange was successful but the requested element
is not present, nil is returned in the case of string values.
11 CalDataSent – Data sent, but no response
-9 CalNoDataSent – No data sent
-10 TimeOut. No response from CALYPSO
-11 No connection to CALYPSO
-12 Timeout during communication setup
-13 TimerError
7 Value immediately after connection setup (see “State”)
Property Function
???? Windows system errors and their numbers
ErrName Calypso.ErrName is assigned the "Description" parameter of a sys-
(Read access only) tem error. Specific errors of the CALYPSO object (-9 to -13, 11) cur-
rently contain no designation of the error.
ErrMessage Permits a message to be issued: If the property is Calypso.ErrMes-
Example: sage = True, a message window (“MsgBox”) with the error code will
be displayed as soon as the condition Calypso.ErrNo < 0 is met.
MyCalypso.ErrMessage =
False Default: False
Important! The use of a MsgBox in ActiveX components can cause
problems: A MsgBox interrupts program execution and must be ac-
knowledged by the user.
WaitResponse Defines whether to wait for a response for the data exchange func-
Example: tions. The waiting duration then depends on the property Calyp-
so.TimeOut.
MyCalypso.WaitResponse =
True Default: True
State Returns a numerical value for the status of the socket connection.
Meaning:
0 SckClose
1 SckOpen
2 SckListening
3 SckConnectionPending
4 SckResolvingHost
5 SckHostResolved
6 SckConnecting
7 SckConnected
8 SckClosing
9 SckError
ConnectCalypso and CloseCalypso are assigning functions.
Function Purpose
ConnectCalypso Sets up the connection to CALYPSO. Successful execution is a pre-
Example: condition for all access functions.
e = MyCalypso.ConnectCa- The return value is the “State” property (type: long). The “ErrNo”
lypso property is possibly assigned an error number.
If e <> 7 Then State = 7 means: connection has been set up.
err = MyCalypso.ErrNo
errTxt = MyCalypso.Err- Any other return value indicates an error. See ➤State proper-
Name ty [⇨ 8‑107].
MsgBox( err & " " &
errTxt)
End If
CloseCalypso Ends a connection between the client VB/VBA program and the CA-
LYPSO server.
The return value is the “State” property (type: long; see ➤State
property [⇨ 8‑107]).
The “ErrNo” property is possibly assigned an error number.
Function Purpose
GetInspectionName Returns the name of the measurement plan currently loaded in CA-
LYPSO.
Type: String
The result is "Default" if no measurement plan is loaded.
YA = myVector.Y
ZA = myVector.Z
WScript.Quit[1]
Menu bar / Toolbar The menu bar contains all functions needed for editing the template as
well as for importing, printing, and saving.
The toolbar contains the most important functions in the form of icons.
Configuration area In the configuration area, you can use the following tabs to define the
protocol template:
Pages Serves to ➤set up the pages [⇨ 9‑5] and select the page to be
edited.
Toolbox Provides ➤general element templates and templates for form
plots [⇨ 9‑9] for designing the pages.
Data providers Serves to ➤link the features [⇨ 9‑22] on the template pages with
the characteristics.
Properties Allows you to ➤customize the element [⇨ 9‑19] activated in the
work area.
Work area The work area shows the results of the settings and entries made.
To enlarge or reduce the view, use the slider in the upper right corner of
the work area or the functions available via View ® Zoom.
Deleting pages
1 Select the desired page on the Pages tab and select Delete from the
context menu.
Header line
Content area
Footer line
Merge pages The table of contents combines all successive pages having the same
name.
Page sta- The table of contents displays an icon for each report page, indicating
tus whether or not the measuring results of the respective page are with-
in the defined limit values.
You can choose between several sets of icons.
Page Thumbnails A thumbnail is displayed in the table of contents for each report page.
You can change the size of the thumbnails.
5 To rename a report page, click the name of the page on the Pages
tab and change the name as desired.
Tip: Use the context menu of a category to group and re-arrange the
element templates of the area.
Alternative procedure
1 Drag the characteristic from the Data providers tab to the page.
2 Select the desired element from the open selection list. The list con-
tains only elements that are suitable for the respective characteristic.
3 In the work area, adjust the frame, i.e. the size of the element to the
content to be inserted. The following contents can be added:
• ➤Text and variables [⇨ 9‑10]
• ➤CAD views [⇨ 9‑11]
• ➤Lines [⇨ 9‑12]
• ➤Reports and tables [⇨ 9‑14]
• ➤Form plots [⇨ 9‑17]
Tip: You can use the context menu of an element and the Windows
standard shortcuts for cutting, copying, and pasting – even spanning var-
ious report pages.
Changing the appear- The Properties tab in the configuration area allows you to define the
ance appearance of the element, e.g. line type, colors and font. The most im-
portant properties may also be changed via the context menu of the el-
ement.
For a uniform design of several elements, you can simultaneously modify
the appearance of several elements or adopt it from other elements
(➤Changing element properties [⇨ 9‑19]).
Tip: Instead of repeatedly changing the properties of frequently used
elements, you can modify element templates and create your own tem-
plates (➤Modifying and creating element templates [⇨ 9‑27]).
Arranging elements on Elements can be easily positioned using the mouse. Like in other graphic
one page programs, you can align several elements to each other and distribute
them uniformly. Rulers and grids help you position the elements precisely
(➤Arranging elements on one page [⇨ 9‑20]).
Deleting an element
1 Highlight the element and press the DEL key.
- or -
Use the corresponding context menu function.
Tip: To access further editing options, double-click the image. You can,
for example, change the view or the color of the CAD model.
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to include meta in-
formation on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout.
Tip: Once you have completed the definition of the CAD model view,
you can use the context menu to delete the CAD data from the protocol
template in order to save memory space (Image ® Remove CAD da-
ta).
The Dynamic image element template allows you to output the cur-
rent image from any directory. This may be, for example, the image of a
measuring machine's monitoring camera or an automatically created
CAD view of components.
Example By means of PCM commands, for example, you can save CAD model
views in a directory during the CNC run. Include a dynamic image in the
protocol template to allow for output of the image stored in this directory.
Result: The current image will then be included in the printout.
You may insert any number of edge points. The edge points can be re-
moved again using the context menu.
Tip: To connect two lines, drag the end point of one line to the end point
of the other line.
Label To label a line:
1 Enable the Text visible option in the context menu.
3 You can add anchor points to some elements, for example, to connect
a line to a certain object of a CAD view:
• Use the context menu of the element to add an anchor point: for
example, via Image ® Add connection point.
• Drag the anchor point to the desired position.
• Drag the other end point of the line to the anchor point.
If you move one of the connected elements, the line will automatically
be moved, too.
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to easily include in-
formation on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout. Drag the
MIBA flag element to the CAD model. Small circles indicate the points
where you can fix a banner. Then select the desired characteristic.
Tip: To select a template row, select an element of the template row and
press ESC. By pressing ESC once again, the table will be selected as parent
element.
Following pages The protocol contains all measurement plan data to be output. The table
will be continued on following pages, if necessary.
– The report page will be copied if not defined otherwise. Data will only
be output within the defined table frame.
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
1 2 ...
NOTICE
Bear in mind that the header and footer settings of the master page also
apply to following pages. If necessary, disable the use of the master page
in the following page properties.
NOTICE
Form plots will be available if supported by the corresponding measuring
software.
To define the specific form plot properties, select 2D plot on the Prop-
erties tab.
The following table gives an overview of the various form plots and their
essential properties.
Plot Function
Plane plot Displays the flatness of a workpiece.
Tip: If the Peaks: Visible option is disabled, the shadow of the
measuring curve on the plane will no longer be hidden by the peaks.
Fourier plot Displays the evaluation of the waviness.
For the representation, you can specify a suppression level and select
different colors for the values which are above or below this level.
Linear or logarithmic representation of the values is possible:
In the properties, select the Logarithmic Y axis option in the 2D
plot group.
Three options are available for the representation of the tolerance
lines:
– Individual lines
– Connected steps
– Curve
Straightness plot Represents the result of the linearity evaluation as well as the evalu-
ation result of the unwinding of circle, plane and curve.
If you enable the Point distance fixed option in the in the Da-
ta group, the X axis will not be scaled in mm but in points. The points
are distributed at uniform distances on the X axis.
Circle in profile plot Determines the fitting surface accuracy of a round component in a
profile.
The deviations are represented with two error scaling values. You can
enter a value for both error scaling types.
Circle plot Evaluates the roundness.
The deviation between the measurement points and the ideal circle
is shown. The nominal circle always results from the size of the form
plot. The coordinate system determines the position of the circle in
the coordinate system.
If you enable the Stack multiple plots option in the 3D plot
group of the Properties, all measurement values will be adjusted to a
nominal value during the evaluation and displayed accordingly.
Curve form plot Displays the result of the curve form evaluation.
The curve may not be a closed curve. This plot shows the nominal
curve, the tolerance curves and the connection line between the ac-
tual points.
Plot Function
Bore pattern plot Evaluates the fitting surface accuracy.
You can, for example, show the arrangement of several bores. Only
the center of the bores is considered for the evaluation. Values lo-
cated within or outside the tolerance bounds can be shown in various
pen colors and the actual and nominal positions can be marked with
different icons.
If a counterpart is to be evaluated, the fitting surface accuracy can be
determined by mirroring: In the properties, enable the Mirroring
option in the 2D plot group.
Pitch plot Displays both the circular pitch and the linear pitch.
For the representation, you can specify a suppression level and select
different colors for the values which are above or below this level.
Icon Function
Align left
Align right
Align top
Align bottom
Center horizontally
Center vertically
NOTICE
The function always affects the element selected last, which is highlighted
in color.
Distributing elements To distribute elements uniformly along a horizontal or vertical line, use
the following icons (or the corresponding points in the Format menu):
Icon Function
Distribute horizontally
Distribute vertically
Arranging elements in To arrange elements in an overlapping manner, use the context menu
an overlapping manner functions:
– Bring to front
– Bring to back
Positioning elements For precise positioning of elements, you can enable the following utilities
precisely in the View menu:
Icon Function
Ruler
Grid
Snap to grid
Canceling a reference
1 Select Remove data binding from the context menu of the icon.
Setting a link
1 Select the desired element in the work area.
2 Open Reference in the context menu of the element and select the
action to be performed after clicking the element.
Tip: By selecting Edit reference , you open a dialog box for easy
setting of the parameters.
Removing a reference
1 Open the context menu of the element and select Reference ® No
reference.
Managing CALYPSO
.................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Prerequisite: CALYPSO is installed correctly and the data is saved on the
hard disk.
1 Exit CALYPSO.
2 In the Windows Start menu, select Start ® Pro-
grams ® Zeiss ® Calypso ® Save CMM data and follow the
instructions of the program.
3 You can enter any folder.
After completion of the data backup, the config folder with the saved
data is stored in the specified folder.
4 Burn the config folder on a CD ROM.
2 In the Define Test Outputs dialog box, tick the check boxes for the
desired test settings and close the dialog box.
Note: The Record geometry calculation check box should only
be ticked when instructed to do so as this triggers resource-intensive
processes.
3 Run the measurement plan with the test settings.
4 Note the paths and names of the files to be forwarded to Carl Zeiss.
2 In the Error Report for Defaults dialog box, tick the check boxes
for those files that are to be attached when saving or for which saving
is to be proposed as default in the Save Error Report dialog box.
3 Activate Show dialog when saving if the Save Error Report
dialog box is to be displayed with these defaults when saving. Addi-
tional settings are possible in this case.
If you untick the check box, the files defined here will be attached
automatically when saving without any additional query.
4 Press OK to confirm.
Error Report
File Extras Settings
Address Selection
Steps to reproduce:
Marker
User management
Managing users
1 As the Master user, you manage your users in the system settings.
Open the Users notebook via Extras ® Settings ® User. The
Management page is displayed.
The name of the current user (“Master”) is shown in the User field.
NOTICE
The selection of privileges the Master will assign to normal users usually
depends on the user’s task and experience.
The “Master” user can assign privileges for two areas:
– General user privileges
– User privileges for AutoRun
General user privileges The following general privileges can be assigned:
– Environment Setup
– Define Directories/Paths
– Equipment Setup
– Save other users' measurement plans
– Execute changed measurement plans of other users
– Run Measurement Plans
– Measurement Setup
– Evaluation/Output Setup
– Change printout header parameters in measurement plans
– Change compensation settings for several measurement plans
Assigning privileges
1 Select Extras ® Settings ® Users and open the Privileges note-
book page.
2 Click the name tab of the user you wish to assign privileges to.
NOTICE
The Master user can change each user’s password.
NOTICE
Only the Master user has the right to activate or deactivate automatic
login.
NOTICE
To be sure that all changes in the notebook take effect, save all open
measurement plans, close CALYPSO and log in again.
NOTICE
Prerequisite for automatic detection of the probe is the firmware version
10.45.
Star_1 Sphere
SNo
R: Date
R:
S:
S:
X: X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z: Type: Tilt:
VAST Rotate:
OK
vided (i.e. a fitted probe with adapter plate), only the name of the
stylus system and the name of the first stylus can be assigned.
Note: If a stylus system with the option of a multi-stage stylus change
exists (e.g. an articulating probe holder with probes provided with a
stylus changer), different dialog boxes will open.
The selection box includes the installed probe.
The “Simulation” option offers all probes that have been selected in the
configuration of the measuring machine.
You may adopt the default designation of the RDS carrier or define a
name of your choice. This name is entered in the empty field and trans-
ferred to the system by clicking Add. The new designation is now dis-
played in the selection field. This RDS carrier may by assigned later to an
RDS holder. You have to define a designation in the New stylus sys-
tem field. This stylus system may later be assigned to a stylus change
holder of the XXT type. The name of the stylus defines the individual
stylus.
Note: If you use several RDS carriers, you must already define here the
assignment to the RDS carrier here (e.g. XXT_TL1 or XXT_TL2). You can-
not change the assignment subsequently.
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders. Additionally, in
the case of the SP25, a name for the module must be defined. This
module cannot be assigned to a holder.
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab in CALYPSO.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
You will find detailed information on this window in Probing system
qualification in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
2 Click the Insert new stylus button.
3 In the Create new stylus window, enter the name and number to
be used for referencing the stylus.
With respect to the name, CALYPSO does not distinguish between
uppercase and lowercase characters.
The number must be unique within the stylus system. Therefore, you
can only choose among the free stylus numbers or enter a higher
number than the last one of the selection list.
Renaming a stylus
In the Probing System Qualification window, you can change the name
of a stylus at any time, but you cannot change its number.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change.
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system and
the dimensions (length) of the master stylus:
Type RDS DSE
CMM Arm 1 Arm 2 / Individ. Bridge Arm 1 Arm2 / Indi-
vid.
XS = 0/ XM 0/ -XM 0/ XM 0/ XM 0/ -XM
YS = 55 / -ZM 55 / -ZM 55 / -YM 73 / -ZM 73 / -ZM
ZS = 135 / YM 135 / -YM 135 / -ZM 155 / YM 155 / -YM
2 Select the name of the stylus whose position you want to define.
You can see the currently valid values for the edited angle position
under Angle (A/B).
3 Define the desired angle position using one of the following methods:
• Click To Feature to align the angle position parallel to the axis of
a feature.
• Under System, select a coordinate system and an axis and click
System / Axis to align the angle position parallel to the selected
axis.
• Under X, Y and Z, enter the direction of a vector and click Sys-
tem / Vector to align the angle position in the direction of the
selected vector.
3 Enter the name of the stylus system whose positions you want to de-
fine.
4 Enter here the maximum taper angle.
5 Edit the list of the angle positions of the RDS stylus and use the fol-
lowing functions:
Icon Function
Deletes the contents of the stylus list.
Adds a new line in the list below the marked line or at the end of the list.
6 To edit a list cell: Click the list and enter the values directly.
- or -
Define the desired angle position on the RC position tab and click
Transfer to list.
7 In the Styli list, enter the stylus name and the corresponding posi-
tions of the articulating probe (angles A and B in degrees).
You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole list using
the context menu. We recommend using stylus names that contain
the angular positions – that helps you later choose the correct stylus.
Note: Avoid those angular positions of the articulating probe in which
stylus shaft directions are close to the shaft direction of the reference
sphere, as there is a relatively high risk of shaft probing in this case.
8 Click Close.
The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new stylus system
is created in the stylus system management. Each row of the styli list
creates a separate stylus.
The data path and name are assigned by default and can be changed.
9 Close the RC List window.
In the Probing system qualification window, you can now click the CNC
Probing system qualification icon to begin qualifying the RDS po-
sitions.
3 Enter the A and B angle values for the Start angle and End an-
gle.
4 Define whether you want to determine the Step Width or the Step
Count.
5 Click Calculate Styli Angle.
The field shows the calculated angular positions as own styli together
with the standard “<AngleA>_<AngleB>” stylus name.
6 Edit the list as required.
You can also edit lines and delete lines via the context menu.
7 Confirm your entries with OK.
The dialog box closes and the table is transferred to the RC List win-
dow.
Qualification
Master stylus
Qualification
Stylus for
measurements
Master stylus for refer- You must use the master stylus for “qualification of the reference
ence sphere qualification sphere”. Master styli are usually identified by a red dot. You must always
set the angle position A = 0°, B = 0° for articulating probe systems.
NOTICE
All corrections made to the measured data refer to the master stylus. The
master stylus must therefore be protected. Never use the master stylus
for a normal measurement during operation.
Inclination angle:
Rotation angle:
OK Cancel
Risk of collision
With certain stylus designs, the travel path to the reference sphere auto-
matically generated by CALYPSO may lead to collisions. In this case, define
your own travel path (➤Defining a manual path for stylus qualifica-
tion [⇨ 11‑36]).
Qualification of styli
Basics about stylus qualification
A stylus must be qualified:
– If you have installed a new stylus system that has not been qualified
yet.
– If you want to re-qualify a stylus system, for example after a collision
or due to thermal changes.
Stylus qualification run Before you qualify styli, make sure that you have opened a measurement
plan and that CALYPSO knows the position of the reference sphere (see
➤Qualifying the reference sphere [⇨ 11‑22]).
You qualify styli in the Probing system qualification window:
Star_1 Sphere
SNo
R: Date
R:
S:
S:
X: X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z: Type: Tilt:
VAST Rotate:
OK
installed the RDS-CAA (Computer Aided Accuracy) option (see in the op-
erating instructions for the RDS-CAA option under Qualifying the RDS
with CAA (option)).
Playing a video To play a video about stylus qualification, click 022_TasterEinmes-
sen_XXT_Music.htm.
Global setting The global check of stylus values is defined in the system setup on the
Stylus system notebook page or under Resources ® Stylus sys-
tem ® Stylus check during CNC start ® ...for all Measure-
ment Plans.
Measurement plan-relat- Deviating settings for the current measurement plan can be defined un-
ed setting der Resources ® Stylus system ® Stylus check during CNC
start ® ... for this Measurement Plan.
NOTICE
As of CALYPSO version 5.0.10, the external “Bossfaktor.exe” program is
no longer required for the entry of the sensitivity factor. CALYPSO
prompts you during the qualification of the stylus to enter the sensitivity
factor in CALYPSO.
Automatic functional When changing a stylus, CALYPSO automatically tests the functioning of
testing the 3D microstylus and indicates a defect in the Status Window.
Sensor signal monitoring The sensor signal monitoring allows you to monitor the stylus deflection.
NOTICE
Sensor monitoring can only be called if CALYPSO is connected to a CMM
of the F25 type. In the simulation mode, it is not possible to open the
sensor monitoring.
If the sensor monitoring function has been activated, the current stylus
deflection is measured at regular intervals and displayed in an X-Y dia-
gram in the Display Sensor Signals window. The diagram shows the
stylus deflections from Start or Reset.
– The probing operations are represented on the X axis as consecutive
numbers. The current probing rate is displayed in Points / s below
the diagram.
– The Y axis indicates the deflection:
– The red curve visualizes the deflection in X direction.
– The green curve visualizes the deflection in Y direction.
– The brown curve visualizes the deflection in Z direction.
Below you will find a description of the most important sensor signal
monitoring functions.
Showing and hiding Use the X, Y, Z and zero line check boxes (at the right border below
curves the diagram) to show or hide the curves as required.
Changing the probing The current probing rate is displayed in Points / s below the diagram.
rate You can change the probing rate using the slider located to the left of
Points / s.
NOTICE
If the probing rate is below 20 Point / s, the curves are not accurate
enough to reliably represent the changes in deflection.
NOTICE
The probing rate decreases automatically in the course of the recording.
This problem can be solved by restarting or resetting the sensor signal
monitoring (see further below).
Optimizing the display The zooming functions enable you, for example, to examine certain sec-
tions in detail or to display the entire curves before printing them.
Use the sliders to the left and to the right of the Print button to scale
the axes of the diagram:
– Left slider scales the Y axis.
– Right slider scales the X axis.
– FitSignals scales the Y axis in a way to display in the diagram all the
measuring results of the currently represented period.
Optimizing axis labeling The arrow keys in the upper left corner of the dialog box increase or
reduce the number of decimals used for the Y axis.
Printing and saving You can print the curves, save them as images or output them in tables.
curves
Print Prints the diagram as it is displayed
SaveAsBMP Saves the diagram as it is displayed as bitmap
SavePoints Saves all measurements recorded from Start or
Reset in an Excel table
Controlling sensor signal By clicking the Start/Stop button, you start and end the sensor signal
monitoring monitoring.
To reset the sensor signal monitoring during operation, click Reset.
Click Close to close the window.
Other settings The following settings are intended for the Carl Zeiss service and should
not be activated by you:
– Temp Offset
– DebugC99
– Vector
There is danger of collision if the styli you use are very short. Under these
circumstances, reduce the value for Taper Angle.
The smaller the taper angle, the smaller is the section of the surface of the
reference sphere which is probed for qualification.
Risk of collision
With certain stylus designs, the travel path to the reference sphere auto-
matically generated by CALYPSO may lead to collisions. In this case, define
your own travel path (➤Defining a manual path for stylus qualifica-
tion [⇨ 11‑36]).
shaft direction and will therefore not be probed again during the CNC
qualification.
Then you must probe three points on the cylindrical stylus in a circle
and the next three points in a circle that is offset with respect to the
first circle. After that, you can make any probings that you wish.
6
4 5
3
1 2
5 Enter here the intermediate positions for the travel path of the stylus
to the reference sphere and back. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control con-
sole to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
Click Qualification as soon as you have reached a safe position in
front of the reference sphere from which CALYPSO can then take over
the qualification of the stylus. A line with X = 0, Y = 0 , Z = 0 and the
“calib” type is inserted and the Way back button is activated.
Click Way back if the stylus should return on the same path. The
points are automatically inserted in the list. Otherwise, define other
intermediate positions for the way back.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
The individual travel path for the qualification of the stylus is defined and
will be used for each subsequent automatic qualification.
Risk of collision
With certain stylus designs, the travel path to the reference sphere auto-
matically generated by CALYPSO may lead to collisions. In this case, define
your own travel path (➤Defining a manual path for stylus qualifica-
tion [⇨ 11‑36]).
If the results are stable, you have reached the limit based on all of the
factors mentioned above. You can regroup the stylus system to increase
the rigidity. Qualification with a short, rigid stylus (e.g. the master stylus)
can determine systematic errors of the CMM.
NOTICE
Try to gather all the geometric data on one single reference sphere. Use
the second reference sphere or the virtual reference spheres for the dy-
namic re-qualification.
Conditions:
You see the data of the stylus system used. In the list on the left, all
available (qualified) styli of this stylus system, the current qualification
status as well as the respective reference sphere are displayed.
On the right side, the styli to be qualified with this characteristic are
displayed with mode and reference sphere.
In the CNC run, the position of reference sphere 1 is first measured
with the master stylus.
• Select under Stylus system the MasterProbe entry.
5 Define the characteristics for the qualification of the various stylus sys-
tems.
• Define, using Add and Delete, the styli to be qualified with the re-
spective characteristic.
Example: Only styli 2 and 4 of a star stylus are to be qualified. In this
case, mark stylus 1, 3 and 5 and click Delete.
• For the marked stylus or styli, set the desired qualification mode for
this characteristic under Mode.
6 Select File ® Save to save the measurement plan.
NOTICE
If the measurement plan contains exclusively characteristics for stylus
qualification, it is not necessary to define any base alignment or clearance
plane.
NOTICE
If you have changed the stylus name after creation of the measurement
plan, CALYPSO will skip these styli during qualification. You will have to
transfer the respective stylus in the corresponding characteristic from the
Styli available list on the left back to the Selected styli list on the
right.
1 Select Plan ® CNC-Start or click the Run Measurement Plan
icon.
2 Select in the Start Measurement window, under Selection, the
Current Alignment, and, under Navigate-Feature To Fea-
ture, the Use Position Points Only entry.
3 Start the measurement plan with OK.
Note: If using more than one (real) reference sphere, CALYPSO, when
changing to another reference sphere, always travels first in +Z to the
end of the measuring range, then to the next reference sphere in X
and Y.
The stylus systems have been qualified. You may proceed with the desired
measurement plan for measuring the workpiece.
NOTICE
Passive stylus become invalid after recalculation and are disabled for the
CNC probing system qualification. Only manual qualification will be pos-
sible then.
Copying styli
1 In the navigation area for the respective stylus system, select the Sty-
lus data category.
The Stylus area opens in the display area.
2 In the Styli available list, click the stylus whose data you wish to
accept and select Copy from the context menu.
The Create new stylus dialog box opens.
3 In the Stylus and Stylus no. input fields, enter the stylus name and
number and confirm with OK.
The data of the copied stylus is then used to create a new stylus.
The colored backgrounds indicate whether the stylus is valid and suit-
able for measurement (green) or invalid (red).
2 Click the header of the respective table column to sort the entries in
ascending or descending order.
You can edit the stylus names, stylus numbers and some geometric
data.
3 For editing, click the desired field and make your modifications.
Note: Please keep in mind that other data is calculated on the basis of
the edited data. The calculated data and the qualification data cannot
be modified.
4 Click Recalculate Stylus Data to reestablish data consistency.
5 Click the Apply button to accept the changes.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Click the Stylus system management icon. The Stylus system
management window will open.
3 In the Stylus System Functions group, click Print.
The Stylus system printout window is opened.
NOTICE
The same data are also output to a file during the CNC run if you activate
the output of the stylus data under Resources ® Results to File.
Version: 1.0 %
typ name available
stylusdata: X 1
stylusdata: Y 1
stylusdata: Z 1
stylusdata: R 1
stylusdata: S 1
stylusdata: ForceX 1
stylusdata: ForceY 1
stylusdata: ForceZ 1
stylusdata: shaftX 1
stylusdata: shaftY 1
stylusdata: shaftZ 1
stylusdata: Temp 1
stylusdata: Date 1
stylusdata: geometry 0
stylusdata: Mode 0
stylusdata: Paranamest3 0
stylusdata: aAxis 1
stylusdata: bAxis 1
stylusdata: cncCalib 0
% typ name value
setting: column 5
setting: width 12
Editing the INI file The file can be edited with a conventional text editor.
– In the first block, you define which stylus date is included in the print-
out. 1 means “in the printout”, 0 means “not in the printout”.
– In the second block, you define the number of columns in the table
(column) and the column width (width).
Structure of a reference
sphere Sphere
Reference
sphere shaft
Sphere shaft
Reference
sphere holder
The reference sphere consists of the reference sphere holder and the ref-
erence sphere shaft that is attached at a certain angle to the reference
sphere holder. The reference sphere shaft consists of the sphere and the
sphere shaft.
Reference sphere man- CALYPSO can work with several reference spheres. The data of the ref-
agement erence sphere used is considered for stylus qualification.
Use the Reference sphere management dialog box to manage your
reference spheres. This is where the data of all reference spheres used on
the CMM is stored.
RSH-514
RSH-Compact
RSH-105-A
RSH-187-M
CMMs concerned The CMM type and the machine configuration determine whether your
CMM supports bending correction. For more information, please refer to
the operating instructions or the data sheet for your CMM.
NOTICE
The exact direction (rotation/inclination angle) of the reference sphere
shaft is required for reference sphere correction. Semi-automatic RSH
shaft definition must be carried out to accurately determine the orienta-
tion of the reference sphere shaft.
Date 31.1.2013
Temp. coeff.
pos. valid No
Height
Functions
New Copy Copy as virtual reference sphere RSH Shaft Definition
Reset Apply
Close
Type
RSH-Compact CZSphereD30
CZSphereD30
Serial Number
Shaft Radius
CZSphereD15
Temperature Coefficient
CZSphereD8
Roundness Deviation (µm)
OK Cancel
4 Enter the values specified on the certificate or check the values preset
by CALYPSO:
• Serial Number
• Sphere Radius
• Shaft Radius
• Temperature Coefficient
• Roundness Deviation
5 Select the behavior when defining the position with the master stylus:
• Update Stylus Data: Recommended setting for conventional
reference spheres
• Do not change stylus data: Recommended setting for optical
reference spheres (this requires definition of the master stylus on a
conventional reference sphere prior to optical definition of the op-
tical reference sphere).
6 Press OK to confirm.
Reference sphere
Qualification date
X:
Y:
Z:
R=
Nx=
Ny=
Nz=
Serial No.
Ident No.
OK Print
3 Click Print to print the representation and the data on the default
printer.
4 Click OK to close the dialog box without any output.
NOTICE
The rotary table is a fourth axis for the CMM and thus contributes to the
expected measuring uncertainty. For an accuracy estimate in the case of
features measured with the rotary table, the permitted four-axis deviation
of the CMM must always be used.
In particular, the quality of the rotary table axis qualification has a strong
influence on the accuracy that can be achieved. For this reason, you
should proceed with great care (see ➤Qualifying the rotary table ax-
is [⇨ 12‑15]).
Follow the safety instructions given in the respective rotary table operating
instructions.
Always make sure that the workpieces and their fixtures do not protrude
the edge of the faceplate; there is a risk of inadmissibly high peripheral
speeds.
Do not change the loading while the rotary table is in motion.
When the CMM drives are switched off, the RT-AB can be rotated man-
ually.
The CMM drives can be switched off, for example, by pressing the emer-
gency stop button.
The drives drop immediately in case of an emergency stop. Then the rotary
table slows down depending on the mass moment of inertia of the loaded
rotary table. A fully loaded RT-AB requires a stopping distance of approx.
60°.
In case of power failure, the air bearing of the rotary table is depressurized,
thus decelerating the rotary table.
In case of stylus collision (without dropping of the CMM drives), the rota-
tional axis is decelerated according to the acceleration ramp set in the
control.
If a “hard” collision occurs, e.g. a collision of the ram with an object
clamped next to the rotary table, the CMM drives will drop. The rotary
table will then coast instead of being braked, which involves the risk of
another collision.
NOTICE
For safety reasons, the C99 CMM control monitors the mass moment of
inertia. If the position of the MMI switch does not match the mass mo-
ment of inertia determined by the CMM control, CALYPSO will output
an error message and stop the CNC run.
– If you tick the Redefine at every CNC start check box, the mass
moment of inertia will be redetermined by CALYPSO every time you
start the CNC run.
– Otherwise, the value will be taken from the measurement plan with-
out redefining it.
This procedure reduces the duration of the measurement. It can,
however, only be used if the mass distribution and the fixture are
always the same for all CNC runs.
NOTICE
The control unit continuously monitors the MMI. If the value transferred
to the control unit at CNC start does not comply with the actual MMI, an
error message will appear.
Manually determining In the Rotary Table window, you can have the mass moment of inertia
the mass moment of in- determined manually, for example, if you create a new measurement plan
ertia or want to use it for another workpiece. The value determined will auto-
matically be used for the next CNC run.
When saving the measurement plan, the mass moment of inertia is per-
manently transferred to the measurement plan.
Visualizing the current CALYPSO enables visualization of the current tilting moment caused by
tilting moment the loading (➤Visualizing the tilting moment of the RT-AB rotary ta-
ble [⇨ 12‑38]).
Parameter-coded meas- The PCM Technology option enables parameterization of measuring runs,
uring runs with PCM for example, to simplify measurement of similar workpieces with different
dimensions (parts families). In such cases, different moments of inertia
need to be taken into account.
Two PCM functions are used for this purpose:
– With measureMTMValue, you add an automatic determination of the
mass moment of inertia at any point of the measuring run.
– With setMTMValue, you define a certain value for the mass moment
of inertia of the rotary table with workpiece.
This procedure is only useful if the workpiece remains in exactly the
same position and orientation, e.g. in a firmly mounted fixture.
NOTICE
For a mobile rotary table, you must re-qualify the rotary table position
after each movement of the rotary table. Otherwise, the computation
with CAA generates incorrect results.
Clearance planes On a rotary table with a horizontal rotational axis, only the clearance
planes which are not on the lower plane during the selected RT position
can be used.
It is therefore advisable to use RT clearance planes as here the RT position
is automatically taken into account.
Activated and deactivat- CALYPSO activates and deactivates the following modes automatically:
ed modes – The “Retract to top” mode is deactivated.
– The “Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center” is automatically
activated.
Block / release edges: The edges of the planes at the beginning of the axis (negative axis side)
are automatically blocked.
If you fasten the positive end of the RT axis by means of a tailstock, you
must additionally block the 4 edges of the corresponding plane.
Otherwise you must release the two lower, normally locked edges which
are intersected when the rotary table rotates through the various planes.
Only then is it possible for you to reach all sides when the rotary table
rotates.
RT homing
Like the three linear axes of the CMM (X, Y, Z), the rotary table also has
a home position. This is approached automatically during every CMM
homing. It is, however, also possible to approach the home position man-
ually or automatically during the measuring operation.
In contrast to the linear axes, the rotary table has no mechanical limit stop.
During homing, the zero marking on the scale is reached by the shortest
path and the counter is set to zero. The maximum rotational angle on the
rotary table is not restricted by a mechanical limit stop either; it is re-
stricted by the memory of the counter. The number of possible revolutions
depends on the rotary table type. On an RT1 or RT-AB-300-P, for example,
155 revolutions are possible.
It therefore makes sense to run an automatic RT homing prior to each
CNC run.
not the same in the entire measuring range, there may locally be different
residual errors.
Now, CALYPSO allows you to determine for certain high-precision CMMs
with RT-AB-300-P rotary table the residual perpendicularity errors at the
rotary table location and to compensate them mathematically during the
measurement. Thus, the REWI additional correction makes it possible to
increase the accuracy of your four-axis coordinate measuring machine.
For more information about whether your CMM supports the REWI ad-
ditional correction function, please refer to the operating instructions or
the data sheet for your CMM.
NOTICE
The REWI addition correction function is only used for measurements
with the RT-AB-300-P rotary table.
Details on REWI addi- You can define and activate the REWI additional correction function
tional correction yourself using the “Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx” CALYPSO measurement
plan. You can install this measurement plan from the CALYPSO installa-
tion DVD under "Tools""Measurement Plan Examples". Then the meas-
urement plan is located in the user directory of CALYPSO under workarea
\inspections_examples\inspections_rt_perpendicularity.
A CMM Check, a Rotary Table Check or two reference spheres at different
heights is/are needed for running the measurement plan.
For more information, please refer to the “User instructions for the Per-
pendicularity_RT_Vxx measurement plan”. The document is located in
the <program directory>\userinfo\manuals\de directory. You can also
open it by clicking the User Information button in the CNC start win-
dow.
Once the residual REWI error has been determined, it will be automatically
compensated for mathematically during measurements with the rotary
table.
The REWI additional correction becomes invalid as soon as the location
of the rotary table changes.
Practical notes
For high-precision measuring jobs, it may be of advantage if the dimen-
sions of the device used for defining the local residual REWI errors corre-
spond to the workpiece to be measured. The device for defining the re-
sidual REWI errors should be located at the same position in the meas-
urement volume and should roughly have the same dimensions as the
workpiece. When measuring on the workpiece, approximately the same
guideway sections are then used for defining the residual REWI errors,
thus leading to more exact measuring results.
If maximum accuracy is important, you should perform the definition of
the REWI additional correction shortly prior to the corresponding meas-
uring job if possible. External influences on the residual REWI errors such
as the influence of temperature and workpiece weight can thus be elim-
inated to a large extent.
Groups with the features of the imported measurement plan are in-
serted in both the list of features as well as the list of characteristics.
RT travel commands
File...
Angular Spacing
360 / Show loading of RT
4.00
Rotate to Rotate around Read
0 x 90.0000 0.000000 0.000000 -9.000000
Degree Degree
Lower RT
– Raise RT / Lower RT: The toggle button is only displayed when using
the lowerable rotary table. Lifts or lowers the rotary table.
– Show loading of RT: Shows in a separate window the tilting mo-
ment of the workpiece on the rotary table (➤Visualizing the tilting
moment of the RT-AB rotary table [⇨ 12‑38]).
– Mode: Current mode: “Measure Part” or “Measure RT axis”.
– RT axis date: Date and time of the last axis setting as well as position
and orientation of the rotary table axis in the machine coordinate sys-
tem.
– RT pos absolute: Current counter status of the rotary table. It is set
to zero with RT home position, not with Set RT position to
zero.
Workpiece
coordinate system
When the rotary table rotates, all features, characteristics and coordinate
systems are turned around the RT axis. Errors in qualifying the RT axis thus
have an immediate effect on the precision of the measurement.
Method Use
1-sphere method Standard method for relatively low accuracy requirements.
Ideal for flat workpieces with large diameters (e.g. ring gears). The
highest accuracy is achieved if the workpiece is located at approxi-
mately the same measurement height as the sphere was for deter-
mination of the axis.
2-sphere method For tall workpieces.
Measurement cylinder meth- For tall workpieces.
od This method can also be used for the measurement of shafts with
low deviations in shape. Instead of using a measurement cylinder, the
rotary table axis is set directly on the workpiece prior to each run.
“Self-centering” method Use in proximity to production.
The feature for qualifying the rotary table axis can be secured directly
onto the workpiece palette. This makes it possible to re-qualify the
rotary table axis prior to every workpiece measurement without wast-
ing a great deal of time.
Z CMM
Y CMM
X CMM
1 Secure the reference sphere onto the rotary table top, as far to the
outside as possible.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
Note: An “RT axis” measurement plan is supplied with CALYPSO that
corresponds to the procedure described below.
4 Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
Z’ CMM
Y CMM
X CMM
1 Secure the reference spheres onto the rotary table top at different
heights, as far to the outside as possible.
The different heights should approximately represent the size of the
workpiece to be measured.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
4 Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Measure the two spheres manually with 6 points each.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the spheres under Nominal
Definition.
11Use the spheres to form a base alignment.
In doing so, place the zero point in the upper sphere; use the lower
sphere for the planar rotation.
12Open the definition template for the upper sphere and use Nominal
Definition ® Pattern ® Rotational Pattern to place a loop
over the sphere.
13Enter “0/0/0” at Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
the base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
14Under Angular Pitch, enter the desired value (e.g. “60°”) and under
Real number the matching number of sphere measurements (e.g.
“6”).
15Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
16Repeat step 12 for the lower sphere. However, 0/0/0 must not be set
under Center, rather the actual coordinates of the spheres in the base
alignment.
17In the toolbox or via Measure, select a cone.
18Under Nominal Definition, select Recall.
19Select all spheres in the loops.
20Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
21Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the cone in
the list.
22Click OK to confirm your input.
A message is displayed.
23Click YES to confirm.
24Define the clearance planes for the upper sphere.
25Start the CNC run.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, spec-
ifying tolerances for the angles of the cone.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for work-
piece measurements.
Mechanical
xwz Computed rotary
rotation axis
table axis at
Z' = Z+xwz
0° 180°
Z CMM
xwz Z’ CMM
Y CMM
X CMM
1 Secure the measurement cylinder onto the rotary table top using, for
example, 3-jaw clamps).
2 Insert a qualified stylus that you can use to probe the cylinder as far
towards the top and bottom as possible.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
4 Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Measure the cylinder manually in 2 sections that are as far apart as
possible.
Note: In doing so, make sure that the BA not rotating with RT
entry is selected in the definition template of the cylinder under Nom-
inal Definition.
11Open the definition template for the cylinder and use Nominal Def-
inition ® Pattern ® Rotational Pattern to place a loop over
the cylinder.
12Enter “0/0/0” at Center.
13Under Angular Pitch, enter “180” and under Real number “2”.
14Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
15Probe a point on the measurement cylinder from above.
16Using the cylinder and the point, set the base alignment.
Note: Make sure that you only use the first cylinder in the loop (Cyl-
inder1(1)) for the base alignment.
17Link the two cylinders into a symmetry cylinder.
18Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
19Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the sym-
metry cylinder in the list.
20Tick the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center and
Retract to current side check boxes.
21Click OK to confirm your input.
A message is displayed.
22Click YES to confirm.
23Define the clearance planes for the cylinder.
24Start the CNC run.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, spec-
ifying tolerances for the angles of the symmetry cylinder.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for work-
piece measurements.
Note: If your CMM is equipped with a scanning probe, you should record
the cylinder using scanning paths instead of discrete-point measurement
(see “Scanning”). This leads to more stable results and thus more exact
rotary table measurements.
9 Press OK to confirm.
10Select Resources ® Stylus system ® Probe Self Centering.
11Set the values shown above and confirm with OK.
12Probe the entity from -Z.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the point under Nominal Def-
inition.
13Use this point to form a base alignment.
14Open the definition template of the point and use Nominal Defi-
nition ® Pattern ® Rotational Pattern to place a loop over the
point.
15Enter “0/0/0” at Center.
The coordinates of the point are required here. As this point sets the
base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
16Under Angular Pitch, enter the desired value (e.g. “60°”) and under
Real number the matching number of sphere measurements (e.g.
“6”).
17Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
18In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
19Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
20For the circle and the plane, select all points in the loop.
21Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
22Select Resources ® RT Functions ® Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
23Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the perpen-
dicular in the list.
2 In order to carry out homing with the rotary table at the start of each
CNC run, tick the RT home position check box.
Note: The RT does not move to the home position immediately, only
when the CNC starts.
3 To mechanically align the workpiece at the beginning of a CNC run,
tick the check box for the desired type under Align part mechan-
ically.
• By Eye
• Normal from Feature
• Base Alignment Axis
In this case, after setting the base alignment, the rotary table is posi-
tioned in the CNC run in such a way that the axes of the base align-
ment run parallel to the CMM axes.
You can set the RT position again after RT prealignment.
The LRT is lifted. Measuring values can only be applied in the meas-
uring mode.
The rotary table will automatically switch to the measuring mode as soon
as the CMM is switched on or a connection is re-established.
NOTICE
Do not clamp workpieces on the faceplate and the measuring table.
Do not attach the reference standard to the rotary table. The rotary table
is more flexible than the measuring table, thus causing calibration errors.
Position after
drifting
Original
position
Rotary Table
OK Reset
Measuring errors are avoided because the base alignment rotates along
with the rotary table. CALYPSO does not use the nominal position of the
rotary table for this, but the very precisely measured rotational angle of
the rotary table.
NOTICE
You should carry out a rotary table homing run before you use the rotary
table as a passive RT.
RT travel commands
File...
Lower RT
NOTICE
The Raise RT or Lower RT button is a toggle button that is only dis-
played when a lowerable rotary table is used.
Manual positioning You can also use the joystick of the control console to move the rotary
table.
1 To do so, hold down the button in the left joystick and move it to the
left or right.
2 To display the position you have reached, click Read.
Entering patterns Via File ® Current status of RT axis, you can also enter increments.
RT travel commands
File...
Angular Spacing
360 / Show loading of RT
4.00
Rotate to Rotate around Read
0 x 90.0000 0.000000 0.000000 -9.000000
Degree Degree
Lower RT
NOTICE
The tilting moment shown by the loading display might by inaccurate and
is only an approximate value. Only use the loading display with a loading
weight of at least 20 kg. A lower loading weight causes inaccuracies.
Initializing the loading Before using the rotary table for the first time, the loading display needs
display to be initialized. Initialization must be performed at startup by a service
engineer.
The loading display may only be used with the faceplate used during ini-
tialization. It is not permitted to use a faceplate with a different diameter
or weight.
Opening the loading dis- The loading display can be opened via the RT travel commands win-
play dow (Show loading of RT button) or via the stop light window
(More ® Show RT loading).
The loading display is opened in the RT-AB workpiece positioning
aid window.
Display of the current The green point indicates the tilting moment caused by the workpiece.
loading The current Tilt moment is displayed at the bottom edge of the display
area. If the green point is within the red circle, the tilting moment is within
the permissible range.
If the green point is within the green circle, the tilting moment is in the
optimal range.
The green arrow indicates the direction in which to move the workpiece
in order to set the tilting moment to the optimal range.
To show or hide further detailed information, click the Show / Hide
data button.
NOTICE
The loading display will only be updated if you tick Live view below the
display area. Otherwise, the display will not change, even if you shift the
loading on the rotary table.
Display options The loading display shows the rotary table from above. The displayed
directions correspond to the machine coordinate system.
NOTICE
The loading must must always be used during loading to prevent damage
to the rotary table bearing.
NOTICE
In CALYPSO version 5.2.12, the loading function can not yet be auto-
mated (e.g. via PCM or CMM-OS). This function will be realized in future
versions.
RT clearance planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance planes when a rotary
table is used.
As soon as the rotary table is active, additional clearance planes and
groups are available for the features. The designations of these clearance
planes are composed of RTCP or RTG and an axial direction.
If you use the rotary table to probe rotationally symmetrical objects always
from the same direction (direction of the CMM), it is recommended to
use these RT clearance planes (RTCP...) or RT clearance groups (RTG...).
If you use the usual clearance plane (CP), bear in mind that this clearance
plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it rotates about the
rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see illustration).
The RT clearance planes or groups do not rotate with the base alignment
(and thus the workpiece). The position of the RT clearance planes is re-
ferred to the unrotated base alignment at an RT position of 0 degrees
(see illustration).
Y
Probing direction Probing direction
0°
X SE + X
SE + X RTSE + X RTSE + X
2 Highlight the desired feature and enter any angle under set to or
select an incremental angle. Select On or Off for base alignment ro-
tating.
12Repeat this procedure until all desired points have been probed.
Note: Only the first RT position is displayed in the clearance data as well
as in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Center of symmetry
When measuring workpieces with rotational pattern using the rotary ta-
ble, it is not the stylus that moves to the feature but the workpiece is
rotated in such a way that each pattern features can be measured from
the same fixed probing direction.
Rotate rotary table as In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the Ro-
well tate rotary table as well option in the Rotary pattern dialog box.
Clearance planes An RT clearance plane that defines the direction for probing the work-
piece is to be selected as the clearance plane.
Angle on workpiece and A particularity arises from the different reference systems for angles on
RT position the workpiece and the angle specification for the RT position.
For measurement, the workpiece is rotated in the direction required for
the fixed probing direction. The rotary table must therefore rotate in the
direction counter to the pattern angle.
90°
90°
Probing direction
180°
180° 0°
0°
270°
270°
90°
180°
Probing direction
270°
90°
180° 0°
0°
270°
NOTICE
CALYPSO supports multi-stage stylus systems and stylus system changer
racks. You can find more details under ➤Multi-stage stylus system
change [⇨ 13‑4].
CALYPSO saves the stylus system used to measure a feature along with
the feature. If it is necessary to change stylus systems between features,
CALYPSO can do this automatically. The following prerequisites, howev-
er, must be satisfied:
Prerequisites – The stylus system changer must be configured in CALYPSO.
– The appropriate stylus system must be in the correct holder in the
stylus system changer according to the rack assignment.
The rack assignment can be saved together with the measurement plan.
During a CNC start, CALYPSO checks whether the current assignment
complies with the assignment in the measurement plan and prompts you,
if necessary, to create the correct assignment.
ProMax CALYPSO supports the ProMax extension for a stylus system changer. If
you do not need any styli, ProMax will move the stylus system changer
out of the measuring range of the CMM. Thus you can travel your CMM
in the complete measuring range without restriction and also measure
large components without problems.
setting, the change only depends on whether a holder is available for the
corresponding stylus system in the changer rack.
OK Cancel Help
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the
MCR20!
In the case of a two-stage stylus system change with RDS and MCR20,
the MCR20 rack must be installed in such a way that the RDS does not
need to be swiveled or you set the corresponding RDS angle position on
the MCR20 rack. After picking up the TP20 without circuit module, the
RDS position must correspond to the pickup position in the MCR20.
NOTICE
The Renishaw user guide states that the MCR20 has to be aligned with
a machine coordinate axis. Deviation of up to 0.25 mm from the machine
axis over the width of the magazine (200 mm) is tolerated.
If the TP20 has been activated in the probe configuration, CALYPSO offers
the MCR20 rack type when creating the stylus system changer rack.
When this type is selected, 6 racks will be created.
Special features On account of the special design in the case of a one-stage stylus system
change with the MCR20, you must bear the following in mind:
– After the Store Stylus operation, the probe moves only to the
transfer point, because without a measuring module movement is re-
stricted to the zone of magnetic force – movement without a meas-
uring module outside the MCR20’s zone of magnetic force causes the
controller to issue collision messages.
– No machine operations are triggered by a manual stylus system
change with the MCR20.
Strong solenoids may affect the TP20 probe. If probing fails, switch off the
solenoids if necessary or consult the operating instructions supplied with
the TP20/Renishaw.
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the
SCR200.
Special features On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the fol-
lowing in mind:
– The SCR200 has a photoelectric barrier that is interrupted when a
stylus system change takes place. Movements between individual
holders take place inside the space delimited by the photoelectric
barrier. The stylus system does not move out of this space until the
change has been completed.
Never change the stylus system without calling up the manual or automatic
stylus system change (e.g. by selecting another stylus system in the Prob-
ing system qualification dialog box and changing the stylus system
manually).
Operation of the ACR3 The ACR3 can only be operated horizontally. Maximum two systems may
be interconnected with each other (max. 8 positions). When using ex-
tensions, only the changer located directly at the head of the PH10M may
be used. Otherwise, the resulting force at the PH10M becomes too high.
Meeting tolerances Reliable operation of the stylus changer is only guaranteed if the toler-
ances for probe alignment are met. These are 0.2° for the inclination, roll
and yaw angles. If this is not possible, you must use the AM1 module of
Renishaw.
NOTICE
When using the AM1, measuring range is lost and you have to take an
amount of kinematic uncertainty into account.
NOTICE
For each TP20/TP200 or XXT, you must create an own changer rack in
CALYPSO and qualify it with the RDS plate which is to be used to change
the module or the XXT plate on this changer.
150 mm
System Set Up
File Menus
CMM Configuration
Sensors
Control
RDS
Machine
(None)
Dual arm
Probe
Stylus system
Rotary Table
Panel
Temperature
Interface
Light Signal
AAI
Measuring Systems
Movement
ZEISS Fixed Mounting
Cancel Apply
LineScan (external)
LineScan (internal)
This is where you manage all holders and assignments of your stylus sys-
tem changers.
NOTICE
The arrangement does not need to represent the actual position on the
stylus system changers.
You have the following options:
– Adding, naming, configuring and emptying holders
– Defining approach parameters and paths for holders
– Qualifying holders
– Printing holder parameters
– Deleting holders
– Creating, saving, loading and deleting assignments
– Showing and hiding holder positions
Setting up holders
To use your stylus system changer in CALYPSO, you must map it with all
holder positions by means of symbols in the Automatic stylus sys-
tem change window.
3 Select the type of your stylus system changer and confirm with OK.
4 Enter a new name for the holder.
(For the MCR20, SCR200, FCR25 and XXT stylus system changers, you
enter the name for a complete group of holders.)
An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you selected, ap-
pears in the Automatic stylus system change window.
(With the MCR20, SCR200 and [FCR25] stylus system changers, six
holders are displayed and with the VAST XXT, three holders are dis-
played.)
Note: With the ProMax, all existing holders are automatically defined
when creating a changer. Possibly existing holders of other types (e.g.
MT) with the same names are replaced.
5 Add more holders and racks as necessary, until the configuration of
your stylus system changer in the system matches that at the CMM.
6 If necessary, move the holders and racks using the arrow icons.
Configuring holders
1 To configure the current holder, select the Set stylus system to
stylus system holder entry in the in the Changer selection list.
2 Select the stylus system you want to assign to the holder, and click
OK to confirm your choice.
The name of the stylus system is displayed below the holder.
3 Press OK to confirm.
NOTICE
These values must be checked in any case! You can change the default
if the required value differs (see ➤Checking and changing approach pa-
rameters [⇨ 13‑23]). If the movements of your stylus system must meet
additional requirements, you can also define approach paths (see ➤De-
fining and assigning approach paths [⇨ 13‑27]).
Before setting the positions of the new holders in the machine coordinate
system, determine the approach direction (exception: ZCR) and for
MCR20 and SCR200 the holder angle setting.
ProMax settings
If you use your stylus system changer with the ProMax extension, you can
make additional settings for each holder. For detailed information, please
refer to ➤Stylus system changer operation with ProMax [⇨ 13‑14].
ProMax
If you use the ProMax extension for stylus system changer, you can make
additional settings for each holder of the stylus system changer:
– Address of the ProMax
Enter the ProMax address to which the holder is linked. This allows
CALYPSO to move the corresponding stylus system changer into the
measuring range for stylus change.
– Traveling the stylus system changer and CMM
To shorten the measuring time, you can define simultaneous traveling
of the stylus system changer and the CMM. While the CMM is moving
to the change position, ProMax moves the stylus system changer to
the change position at the same time. The stylus system changer and
the CMM wait for each other at the change position for the stylus.
After stylus change, ProMax moves the stylus system changer out of
the measuring range. At the same time, the CMM is moved to con-
tinue execution of the measurement plan.
However, you can also define that the stylus system changer and the
CMM are not moved at the same time.
Not active
Not active
Rack assignments
NOTICE
If you do not define any assignment, CALYPSO will use your holder def-
initions made in the Automatic stylus system change dialog box.
2 Activate Use rack assignment during start and select the de-
sired rack assignment or enter a formula for the name of the rack
assignment.
During CNC start, the formula is evaluated and the corresponding rack
assignment is set.
By way of confirmation, you can check the composition of the selected
assignment via Display.
At the beginning of the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the real rack assign-
ment and indicates in the Rack Assignment window which stylus sys-
tem is to be loaded into which holder.
It is only then that you can execute the measurement plan.
– Compute the offset from the virtual axis intersection of the RDS axes.
– Qualify the four preset angle positions for the RDS. CALYPSO uses this
information to compute the intersection of the axes.
Note: For the passive scanning sensors (SP25, XXT), their intersection of
the axes of the RDS is determined when qualifying the master stylus.
Normally, you enter the slot distance for these sensors only once. The
entry of the slot distance is sufficient even if a reversal measurement has
been performed. (see ➤Defining the RDS slot distance [⇨ 13‑20]).
X
1
CALYPSO helps you when defining the slot distance. If you know the
value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this directly in the Slot
Distance field.
1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge in the measuring range.
An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine coor-
dinates.
2 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
In the above illustration, this is position 1.
3 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
4 Turn the RDS 180° around its A axis.
In the illustration, this is position 2.
5 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
6 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
7 Check the results in the Slot Distance field. Typical values are
around 38 mm.
The position of a holder is referenced to the intersection of the two ro-
tational axes of the RDS. CALYPSO must therefore calculate the (virtual)
intersection of these axes. To do so, you must qualify the four additional
stylus positions of the CZ master stylus (refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5):
A/B = 0˚/90˚
A/B = 0˚/-90˚
A/B = 90˚/0˚
A/B = -90˚/0˚
This enables safe operation of the stylus system changer not only
when measuring several, larger and higher workpieces but also in case
of complex stylus system and stylus system changer forms.
NOTICE
The stylus system approaches the specified positions by axis. If this move-
ment collides with obstacles on the CMM or on the stylus system changer,
you can define explicit travel paths as safe approach paths.
Note: After changing the approach direction, you must requalify the
holder (except for the DSE). The values entered by you under Posi-
tion in the window are automatically “rotated”. Possible defined
paths are deleted.
6 For RC sensor mounts, select the corresponding required A or B angle
of rotation in steps of 2.5°.
7 Enter the values for Side, Approach Direction and Top for the
following positions During Change, Before Change and After
Change.
Enter these positions relative to the position right in front of the holder
(corresponds to the transfer position).
Note: The directions shown are referenced to this point with view an-
gle to the holder: Side means to the right; Top means to the top;
Approach Direction means here out of the rack!
Top
Side
Approach In
8 (Only for the “master” user): If necessary, move the position in the
holder by a certain amount under Offset.
If you define all theoretically possible paths, you will get per rack assign-
ment a path from the workpiece, a path to the workpiece and a path to
any other holder for each holder.
Then, the stylus system moves along these paths and no longer along the
axis directions from and to the position before, after and during change.
The “additional position”, too, is then no longer valid. The corresponding
definition of these paths makes it possible to avoid collisions with all ob-
stacles on the CMM (workpiece, fixtures, stylus changer racks and other
stylus systems) during stylus system change.
NOTICE
Holders with paths are shown in a darker color in the Automatic stylus
system change dialog box.
Direct movement and The intermediate positions of this list are directly approached and not by
movement by axis movement by axis as is the case with approach parameters. There are
exceptions regarding the transfer points:
– When moving to the changer, the first intermediate position will be
approached by axis as usual: First, movement in the Z axis, then move-
ment in the approach direction and finally movement perpendicular
to the approach direction in the X/Y plane. If the position is below the
current position, movement in the Z axis takes place last.
When moving to the changer, the transfer position is also approached
by axis as usual. You can avoid this by defining the target position as
the last position of the path, e.g. via Import destination.
– When moving from one holder to the next, only the path from the
last intermediate position to the holder is approached by axis; in this
case, the first intermediate position is directly approached.
– With travel after change, the first intermediate position will be ap-
proached by axis as usual. You can avoid this by entering the transfer
position itself as the first position of the path, i.e. “0 / 0 / 0”.
With articulating probe holders, the rotation position is the end of the
path, unless otherwise defined.
“During Change” paths If you have defined a path between two certain holders in the During
Change line, this path will be approached instead of the two “During
Change” positions. For all holder combinations for which you have not
defined any path, the “During Change” positions will continue to be ap-
proached. The intermediate positions are defined at the beginning of the
path relative to the transfer position of the holder. In this case, the rota-
tion position is also at the end of the path, unless otherwise defined.
Changed approach direc- If you change the approach direction of a holder, the holder is no longer
tion qualified. Therefore, all paths to and from the holder are deleted in all
assignments.
Paths and assignments If you hide a holder in an assignment, all defined paths for this holder will
be deleted in this assignment. If you show a holder, the default values for
the approach parameters will be used first. Paths are initially not active.
You can change the default values for the approach parameters if no
assignment is active. From the Administration selection list, select the
Close Assignment entry.
If you create a new assignment, the approach parameters of the previ-
ously active assignment will be applied.
10Enter the point list for the safe path. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Import destination to add the destination holder's transfer
position to the list.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control con-
sole to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
The approach direction has to be set before you define the position of a
holder (see ➤Approach parameters for the stylus system chang-
er [⇨ 13‑22]). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
5 A query “Is the rack in the locked position? (On the right of the swivel
range)” appears. Set the rack to the locked position (as shown in the
dialog) and confirm with OK.
6 Lock the covers with the tool and insert the autojoint gage in holder
1.
7 Remove the stylus from the probe as prompted.
8 Approach the position using the joystick. With Add point you record
the current position and close the window.
9 Remove the gage as prompted and insert the probe again.
By confirming, the creation of probing points is activated again. The
position of the next measured point is shown.
10Probe a point at the left corner of holder 1 in the Z axis.
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the meas-
urement is finished, you will see all holders of the ACR3 in the stylus
system change window.
11Remove the retention pin and close the cover.
12Click OK.
Before you define the holder positions of the MCR20, the covers must be
opened and the approach direction set (see ➤Approach parameters for
the stylus system changer [⇨ 13‑22]). Risk of collision if this procedure is
not adopted.
P5
P4
P3
P6 P7
P1
Z+
Y+
P2
X+
Before you define the holder positions of the SCR200, the covers must be
opened and the approach direction set. The cable between SCR200 and
SI200 (controller for TP200) must be disconnected for the qualification
process, in order to interrupt the signal from the photoelectric barrier (see
➤Approach parameters for the stylus system changer [⇨ 13‑22]). Risk of
collision if this procedure is not adopted.
2 3
4
5
The stylus system is assigned, which can be seen if the stylus system
name appears below the icon for the holder.
5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no stylus system has
been assigned as yet.
Note: In the case of multi-stage stylus systems, it is also possible to
place, for example, an RDS plate with XXT without stylus system on a
holder. If an XXT stylus system is, for example, assigned to an RDS
holder, the corresponding XXT holder is also automatically assigned to
this holder.
3 Click the Changer selection list and select the Store stylus sys-
tem in holder entry.
The CMM places the stylus system in the selected holder. There is then
no longer a stylus system installed in the probe.
4 Click OK.
5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a stylus system, as de-
scribed in ➤Inserting the stylus system [⇨ 3‑16].
3 Click Ref. sphere position and enter the direction of the reference
sphere post.
4 Select the probing mode (recommended: Standard) and probe the
reference sphere in the shaft direction.
When defining the geometry of the master stylus, the reference sphere
must be in the 45°, 135°, 225° or 315° position to prevent collisions with
the reference sphere post.
If the difference between the previous dead weight offset and the new
dead weight offset of the master stylus exceeds 30 µm, you are prompted
to determine the dead weight offset again. The calculation can take a
few seconds to complete.
NOTICE
During the recalculation, the stylus must stand free (without contacting
the material).
2 From the Edit selection list, select Add stylus system holder.
If you entered several probes in the configuration, a selection window
appears.
3 Select the required holder.
When using several different holder systems, you must observe the differ-
ent clearance distances of the holders.
When using the FCR25 holder together with the RDS holder, the During
Change position must be increased to a value of 150 for the FCR25, oth-
erwise a collision with the holder of the RDS may be caused.
You will find more information about the alignment of the VAST XXT probe
in the separate operating instructions for probing systems.
When defining the geometry of the master stylus, the reference sphere
must be in the 45°, 135°, 225° or 315° position to prevent collisions with
the reference sphere post.
When using several different holder systems, you must observe the differ-
ent clearance distances of the holders.
When using the XXT holder together with the RDS holder, the During
Change position must be increased to a value of 150 for the XXT holder,
otherwise a collision with the holder of the RDS may be caused.
The length of the master stylus and the length of the XXT stylus are de-
fined in the Automatic stylus change window.
NOTICE
The conditions for the automatic qualification of the holders is only
checked directly before the execution of the Qualification of stylus
system holders utility.
If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the CNC run is canceled and a
message is displayed informing you that the qualification is not possible.
NOTICE
Another prerequisite is that the holders are positioned as accurately as
possible and the rack is aligned parallel to the axis. The exact require-
ments can be seen in the specification for the individual holders. For ex-
ample, the XXT holder requires a more accurate alignment than the MT
holder.
Conditions:
– The stylus used for the qualification is inserted at the start of the
CNC run.
– The stylus (styli) used for qualification is (are) stored in an already
defined holder (e.g. which is firmly mounted to the machine).
– The stylus used for qualification is not assigned to any holder and
is picked up via a manual change during the CNC run.
1 Use Resources ® Utilities ® Qualification of stylus system
holders to add the Qualification of stylus system holders
utility to the measurement plan.
2 Select the desired holders in the left list and add them to the right list
using Add.
3 Change the order for the CNC run by means of the arrow icons, if
required.
The following information is shown in the list:
• Holder name
• Holder type
• Approach Direction
4 Define the parameters for the qualification procedure in the list:
• Mode: CNC / Manual / Compute
CNC: Qualification in the CNC run
Manual: Switch-over to manual qualification during the CNC run
Compute: No qualification. The data is adopted from the informa-
tion about the holders.
• Stylus system and styli used for qualification
• Datum reference frame
Machine system: The changer is firmly arranged on the measuring
table.
Base Alignment: The changer is arranged together with the work-
piece on the pallet.
• (In the case of RC_CAA) Angle A and Angle B which are used
for qualification
Note: If you have changed and re-qualified holders, this information
is not automatically transferred to this utility.
Configuration of the ID To use automatic stylus recognition, you have to configure it. You can
recognition save the configuration permanently in the system setup or temporarily for
this session in the stylus system management.
– Permanent configuration
You can define different configurations for each CMM in the system
setup. The settings will be transferred if you connect CALYPSO to the
CMM.
– Temporary configuration for this session
You can modify the configuration temporarily for this session in the
stylus system management. The changes have an immediate effect
on the running operation. The defined settings are, however, not
transferred to the system setup.
If you connect the CMM to CALYPSO the next time, the configuration
from the system setup will be used again.
For more information on the configuration of the ID recognition, please
see ➤Preparing automatic stylus recognition [⇨ 13‑47].
Error during stylus If ID errors or ID warnings occur during a stylus system change, CALYPSO
change will support you in detecting the incorrect IDs and eliminating the error.
For more information, see ➤Behavior in case of problems [⇨ 13‑51].
System Set Up
File Menus
CMM Configuration
Sensors Control
VAST Machine
Probe
Max mm
Stylus system
Interface
ID Chip Recognition
Light Signal
Activate
AAI
Settings Measuring Systems
Movement
Simulation
OK Cancel Apply
its components to the stylus system management. Then, the stylus sys-
tems and components are loaded again in the holder.
Please note that the stored positions before, during and after stylus sys-
tem change are not approached in this mode.
If you use a VAST XTR, all angular VAST XTR positions which have not yet
been programmed in CALYPSO will be approached after changing. If at
least one angular position is not yet known, the stylus system will be
moved to the position after change.
AutoRun interface
.................................................................................................................
The illustration below briefly describes the major features of the AutoRun
interface.
Measurement
plan icon Pallet Desk link
Automatic Run
File Con!guration Edit Layer Measurement Stylus system Navigation Tools
View
Testblock1
unnamed(Testblock1)
User Information
CNC Start parameter
Send results to printer Q-DAS
Print plots
Manual Alignment
Measurement
Measurement type
User de!ned
Run
Loops
Stop
Sequence
Several icons Several icons from the same measurement plan can be contained in one
desktop, distinguished, for example, by different start parameters or pa-
rameter files. CALYPSO then assigns a serial number in brackets to the
name of the measurement plan (e.g. “test block1 (2)”).
When you select a run in the CNC start parameters, the name of the run
is appended with a hyphen to the measurement plan name (e.g. “test
block1 - test run”).
X
Part alignment of the
Pallet alignment
first pallet location
– With irregular arrangement, the position of each individual work-
piece is defined by a separate part alignment.
– CALYPSO must know whether the part alignments on the pallet refer
to the pallet system or to the machine system.
Y Y
X X
– If the part alignments refer to the machine system, they are not
moved when offsetting and rotating the pallet system. Therefore,
the base or start alignments of the workpieces must be re-quali-
fied if you wish to change the position of the pallet on the machine
and to maintain the assignment of the pallet and workpieces.
Y
Y
X
X
Pallet types
There are four different pallet types:
Regular Irregular
Pallet The workpieces are positioned ac- The workpieces are freely distribut-
cording to a predefined, regular X- ed on the pallet; the location of
Y grid on the pallet. each workpiece is defined.
With fixed assignment
The base or start align- During a CNC start, only the pallet During a CNC start, only the pallet
ment of the workpiece on system is loaded. The part align- system is loaded. The part align-
the first pallet location (or ments are calculated. ments are calculated.
all pallet locations) refers
to the pallet system.
Regular Irregular
Without fixed assignment
The base or start align- During a CNC start, the pallet sys- During a CNC start, the part align-
ment of the workpiece on tem and the part alignment of the ments of all pallet locations are
the first pallet location (or first pallet location are loaded. All loaded.
all pallet locations) refers other pallet locations are comput- The pallet system is not required for
to the machine system. ed. this arrangement.
The pallet type is determined when defining the pallet (➤Adding a pallet
to a desk [⇨ 14‑31]).
3D pallet CALYPSO also supports 3D pallets for METROTOM evaluations. In this
case, CALYPSO must be connected to a CMM of the METROTOM type.
Additionally, it is possible to specify a Styli List for a regular pattern.
You thus define the number and the distance of the layers in the Z di-
rection.
Then the pallet icon is provided with tabs on the right-hand side for
switching between the individual layers.
– If you enter a positive value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from bottom to top.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
– If you enter a negative value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from top to bottom.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
NOTICE
When you open an AutoRun file with 3D pallets, but CALYPSO is not
connected to a CMM of the METROTOM type, the layers of the 3D
pallets will not be displayed. The pallet will be shown as a 2D pallet with
only the pallet locations of the first layer. In this case, it is only possible
to measure the pallet locations of the first layer.
All layers of the 3D pallet will be available as soon as you connect CA-
LYPSO to METROTOM.
Use This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for exam-
ple: Machine – processing stage – type – workpiece.
On every level, you then create as many branches as there are levels below
it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you access the desk with the
measurement plan for the desired workpiece.
Prerequisites The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can start a meas-
urement are as follows:
– Your AutoRun interface must be loaded (see ➤Loading the AutoRun
interface [⇨ 14‑11]).
– The correct desk must be selected (see ➤Selecting the measuring
configuration [⇨ 14‑13]).
– The correct measurement plan must have been found and marked
beforehand.
– The scope of measurement must be defined (see ➤Defining the scope
and sequence in AutoRun [⇨ 14‑13]).
These preconditions must be satisfied before measurement can be start-
ed.
NOTICE
Please note that the noname.arn file must not be overwritten. The
name of the current AutoRun interface is shown at the bottom left in the
status bar.
While entering the search criterion, CALYPSO shows a list of all icons
containing the current search criterion as keyword or measurement
plan name. No distinction is made between upper and lower cases.
4 If the desired icon is shown in the list, select the icon from the list.
5 To display the list again, click Search or ENTER.
If necessary, CALYPSO changes to the layer that contains the desired icon
and highlights this icon. The highlighted icon is displayed in the dialog
box next to Selected icons.
If no icon matching the entered search criterion is found, the text (Noth-
ing) will be displayed in red next to Selected icons.
NOTICE
If a measurement plan is included several times in a layer, then the search
via measurement plan name shows several icons found. Therefore, check
whether the icons found correspond to the desired search result.
Please select
run
AutoRun 5.0 - Roundness1 (6)
(All Characteristics)
- AutoRun
5.0 - A
Diameter1
Plane
Run
Roundness1
Text
After the start of the CNC run, the marked icons will be executed in the
sequence in which you selected them.
If you have selected several measurement plan icons, first the meas-
urement run information of all selected icons will be displayed; then,
the printout header parameters for all measurement plans will be
queried.
CALYPSO starts measuring. Two windows are opened: the Stop Light
window and, if running is not set in the background, the default
printout.
Once a CNC run has been started, the message “Measurement plan xyz
running” appears in the status bar.
NOTICE
The User Information window does not close automatically. If you have
opened several user information windows and not closed them again,
this may place a load on the system.
If you run several measurement plans one after the other, you can enter
the printout header parameters for all started measurement plans for
which the forced input at CNC start has been activated. This saves you
from entering the parameters at the end of one and prior to the start of
the next measurement plan.
Use the Continue > and < Back buttons to page in the Input Pa-
rameter window through the input pages for all concerned measure-
ment plans and make your settings. On the last page, click OK to start
processing of the marked icons.
After clicking Cancel and confirmation of a query, the CNC run for all
marked icons is started. All entries confirmed with Continue > will be
accepted. For all other measurement plans, the available printout header
parameters will be used.
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the “Forced Input of Printout Header Pa-
rameters at CNC Start” has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these meas-
urement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the pre-parameters
of a measurement plan.
NOTICE
The CAD window is closed by default after every measuring run. If you
want to keep it open, activate Tools ® Show CAD.
– Yellow
The measuring results are within the warning limit range.
– Red
The measuring results are not OK.
Any icon that is not color-coded has not been measured.
In case of pallet icons, the quality of the measuring result is shown for
each individual pallet location.
DIN PAR
The color coding is displayed until the icon is remeasured or the AutoRun
interface is closed.
Result summary You can show a short summary of measuring results for each measured
icon. To do so, highlight the desired measurement plan or pallet icon. The
Result tab shows the following information:
– Short summary
This is where the part number, date and time of the measurement are
shown.
– Visualization of the overall result
The visualization of the overall result is similar to that of the custom
printout. It contains, e.g., the following information:
– Number of characteristics
– Characteristics within tolerance
– Characteristics outside tolerance
– Characteristics exceeding the warning limit
– Characteristics not calculated
– Number of coordinate systems
– Number of text elements
– Saved printouts in PDF format
If you highlight a pallet icon, the summaries of all measured pallet loca-
tions will be listed one below the other together with the number of the
pallet location. In this case, the pallet locations are not sorted according
to the number but according to the moment of the measurement.
NOTICE
The assignment of pallet location and saved actual values of the last CNC
run is not possible with pallets, since the pallet location is not saved.
That’s why the printout header data of the original measurement plan is
used.
An exception is the part number, whose count is incremented by AutoR-
un.
NOTICE
For many of the following instructions you can also use the respective
context menu instead of the menu items of the menu bar.
Configuring AutoRun
Starting AutoRun
1 Close all open measurement plans.
2 Select Plan ® AutoRun.
AutoRun is started and opens the Automatic Run window with a new,
empty AutoRun interface named “noname.arn”.
NOTICE
Only the Master user may set up new users.
NOTICE
For purposes of documentation, you can print the list of privileges of the
selected user. To do so, click the printer icon.
If you do not mark an individual user, the privileges of all users will be
printed.
NOTICE
It is also possible to define the user privileges in the system setup. To do
so, select Extras ® Settings ® Users and enter the privileges on the
User Rights notebook page.
Save Document As
Open Document
Change paths in document Privileges for adapting the fixed paths after copy-
ing the AutoRun interfaces.
Copy/Paste Icon(s) Privileges for working with icons.
Delete Icon(s)
Move/resize icon(s)
Load/remove picture(s) Privileges for the background image.
New Desk Privileges for creating, defining and deleting of
Delete Desk AutoRun interface elements.
Workdesk disabled if “Find run” dialog is open If you assign this privilege, mouse actions will be
disabled in the workspace when the Looking for
run window is open.
This is intended to prevent an unintentional focus
change (and thus unintentional runs) when barc-
odes are being scanned.
Close “Find run” window
Display Alignment Menu items under Tools.
Display Stop Light
Start GEAR PRO manually Privilege for starting GEAR PRO from within CA-
LYPSO.
Configure Stop Light Privileges for additional functions in the Stop Light
window. Cancel, Continue and Reconnect
are also possible without these privileges.
Define Run Parameters Access to the parameters Speed, Results, Base
Alignment, List of Characteristics, Printout Header
Data, information on the measuring run and Pa-
rameter File in the Start Measurement win-
dow, irrespective of which privileges are set for the
individual parameters.
Define “Speed” CNC parameter Access to the speed parameters and to information
on the measuring run in the Start Measure-
ment window even if the privilege for “Define
Run Parameters” is not set.
Define “Results” CNC parameter Access to the result parameters and to information
on the measuring run in the Start Measure-
ment window even if the privilege for “Define
Run Parameters” is not set.
Define “Base Alignment” CNC parame- Access to the base alignment parameters and to
ter information on the measuring run in the Start
Measurement window even if the privilege for
“Define Run Parameters” is not set.
Define “List of Characteristics” CNC pa- Access to the List of Characteristics parameters
rameter and to information on the measuring run in the
Start Measurement window even if the privi-
lege for “Define Run Parameters” is not set.
Defining desks
You can structure your AutoRun interface with the aid of desks. A desk
contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together. You can
change to different desks via branches.
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for exam-
ple: Machine - processing stage - type - workpiece.
1 If you have not yet defined a desk in this interface, select
Desk ® Rename and assign a new name to the “No Name” layer.
(Each time a new AutoRun interface is defined, CALYPSO creates a
desk named “No Name”, which you should rename before use).
- or -
If you have already defined a desk, select Desk ® New and enter a
name.
The name of the new desk appears in a selection list in the toolbar.
NOTICE
Make sure that no measurement plan is open in CALYPSO, because it
would be overwritten in an AutoRun process.
1 Click the Measurement Plan icon and open the desired measure-
ment plan.
CALYPSO creates an icon for the measurement plan and places it in the
top left corner of the desk. Now position the icon and check the CNC
start parameters.
You may also add measurement plans to the desk by importing them as
measurement plan icons (➤Importing measurement plan
icons [⇨ 14‑27]).
Question
Yes No Cancel
Mapping a pallet
Pallets in AutoRun
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted in a regular pattern or
in a free arrangement on a pallet. CALYPSO determines the position of
the pallet on the table by computing the pallet's base alignment. The
position of the workpieces is derived from the alignment of the meas-
urement plan and the column and rows of the pallet.
3D pallet CALYPSO supports 2D and 3D pallets. However, a 3D pallet is only avail-
able if the METROTOM measuring machine is connected to CALYPSO.
You will find more information on 2D and 3D pallets in ➤Basics about
pallets [⇨ 14‑6].
Preparing a pallet
Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step
does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns.
1 In CALYPSO, create a measurement plan specially for the pallet.
It is important that the pallet should have a unique base alignment so
that the program can unequivocally determine the location of the pal-
let.
Adding a pallet
1 Click the Pallet icon and open the desired measurement plan.
The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Pallet Parameters
Pallet Name:
Selection of the
pallet system
Group Columns Group Rows
Input fields for the
Number Distance Number Distance
number and distance
of the pattern in the
X and Y axes for a
regular pallet Styli List
2 Enter a name for the pallet in the Pallet Name input field.
3 Tick the Regular check box for a regular pallet and enter the pattern:
• In the Group Columns group, enter the Distance and the
Number of columns.
• In the Group Rows group, enter the Distance and the Num-
ber of rows.
• If CALYPSO is connected to a METROTOM measuring machine,
you must enter the Distance and the Number of layers in the
Styli List group.
4 Determine the pallet system depending on the type of pallet you wish
to define:
• If the part alignments refer to the pallet system, you must activate
Parts referring to pallet.
• If the part alignments do not refer to the pallet system but to the
machine system, you must deactivate Parts referring to pal-
let.
5 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System se-
lection list.
6 Click LOS Position for a pallet with free arrangement and transfer
the appropriate part alignment for each individual workpiece into the
list in the LOS Position window.
7 Click OK.
The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You
still have the option of defining the size and the appearance of the icon
(➤Positioning and configuring icons on the desk [⇨ 14‑28]).
This enables you to exclude specific positions on the pallet from meas-
urement, e.g. if there are positions on the pallet that do not contain
workpieces.
If you want to ➤approach a pickup position [⇨ 14‑35] after a pallet run
to replace the measured workpiece with the next workpiece, you can use
PCM commands.
3 Enter the loop parameters: Click Insert to insert a line and enter the
start value, end value and step width of the loop.
4 Press OK to confirm.
5 Select the Loops option to prepare the pallet for the CNC run.
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see ➤Prepar-
ing a measurement [⇨ 14‑38]), so that the pallet can be measured.
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see ➤Prepar-
ing a measurement [⇨ 14‑38]), so that the pallet can be measured.
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
In the case of a single pallet, the current pallet location number and the
number of the last pallet location are additionally included in the printout
header data.
Add a query to the post-parameters of the measurement plan. This query
is used to check whether the current pallet location number corresponds
to the last pallet location number. When the numbers correspond to each
other, the CMM should move to a defined position.
Example:
if (getRecordHead("palletlocationnumber") ==
getRecordHead("lastpalletlocationnumber")) then
positionCMM(100,-100,-50)
endif
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
Creating a branch
1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from which
you want to link to another desk by means of a branch.
2 Click the Desk symbol and enter the name of the desk to which the
branch is to lead.
If you want to go to a new desk that has not been defined yet, enter
the new name.
3 Click OK.
CALYPSO creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of the
destination desk).
Preparing a measurement
TestblockRC
User Information
OK Cancel Help
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the “Forced Input of Printout Header Pa-
rameters at CNC Start” has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these meas-
urement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the input param-
eters of a measurement plan.
Defining a printout
You can define the printout header output specifically for each measure-
ment plan and each pallet in the AutoRun interface.
The user privilege for defining the printout is called “Define Printout”.
The printout output via AutoRun is icon-related. Settings which are
changed in a measurement plan icon are only valid for this specific icon
even if the same measurement plan applies to another icon.
If you want to change the printout for several icons of the same meas-
urement plan, edit the original measurement plan and load the settings
of the measurement plan for the individual icons.
These settings are also active when the last custom printout is opened
subsequently. Thus it is possible to open for one measurement several
custom printouts with different formats and settings one after the other.
3 Make the desired settings for the printout on the three index cards.
The settings correspond to those in the Format custom print-
out window for the original measurement plan. The settings for the
default printout, the selection of the Excel and DMIS report and the
printout reset are not included.
- or -
To transfer the settings for these icons from the original measurement
plan to AutoRun, click Load settings from measurement
plan.
4 Tick the Apply settings for next run check box if you would like
that the settings made should only apply to the next CNC run.
The settings made here will be reset after the next CNC run of this
icon.
The check box is ticked by default.
5 Press OK to confirm.
Managing AutoRun
This window shows a list of all desks, measurement plans and icons of
the AutoRun interface and the actual paths. The Valid column shows
whether the path exists.
Note: The setting “Yes” under Valid means that the path exists. This
must not necessarily be the path which contains the object displayed,
however. The setting “No” under Valid means, in contrast, that this
path is not the correct path for the displayed object.
The list shows all desks in the same way in succession.
• The first line is a subheading with the name of the desk.
• The second name contains the path for the background image if
available.
• The following lines contain the desk, pallet and measurement plan
icons included in this desk as well as the paths of the pallet and
measurement plan icons. Additionally with regard to pallets, if no
measurement plan has been inserted in a pallet, the path cannot
be entered and the column with the validity always indicates “No”.
If an icon is linked to an image, a line with the text “(Image)” and the
path of the image file appears after the line with the icon name.
If the icon contains the absolute path for a parameter file (see Loading
parameter file in the CNC run), an additional line with the text “(Pa-
rameter File)” and the path of the parameter file appears after the line
for the image.
2 You can modify the paths by overwriting them.
- or -
Highlight the lines you want to modify. To do so, use the context menu
with its menu items.
Use the Search for and Replace with fields to replace the paths
in the highlighted (or all) lines.
To complete the Replace with field, you can use the Reset and
Looking for directory symbols.
Start replacement by clicking Replace or with OK.
The replacement process is executed.
When ticking the Request Each Replacement check box, you
have the option of confirming or retracting each individual replace-
ment or canceling the entire process.
Otherwise, a message about the number of replacements made ap-
pears upon completion of the replacement.
Note: The names of the image files and measurement plans are not
changed by the replacement. CALYPSO ensures that these names re-
main unchanged.
Managing desks
You can change the name of a desk or delete it from the AutoRun inter-
face. Use for this the Rename or Delete menu item in the Desk menu.
Before renaming or deleting a desk, make sure that the desired one is
displayed on the screen.
Duplex mode
.................................................................................................................
Master Slave
Measured Measured
values values
Calculation
Evaluation
NOTICE
In the same way as in duplex mode, you can also control more than two
measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can increase the
measuring range and you can save measuring time in asynchronous
mode. The procedure is principally the same as in duplex mode; you have
a “master” and several “clients”.
3 On the client computer, select the Slave option and enter the pa-
rameters for coupling:
5 Enter the directory paths for the measurement plans and the base
alignments:
• Directory path: locally valid designation of the corresponding
path on the client computer.
• Mounted as...: valid network designation under which the client
system can access the path on the master system.
The connection in the network must be enabled and active.
##############################################################
########
192.4.1.56 cmmws_2 CMMWS_2 #PC-column2
192.4.1.55 cmmws_1 CMMWS_1 #PC-column1
#
192.4.1.201 cmm_2 CMM_2 #Controler2
192.4.1.200 cmm_1 CMM_1 #Controler1
##############################################################
########
4 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is
“Wait for Master ...”:
You can now proceed to ➤redefine the coupling [⇨ 15‑13] or, if this
has already been done, you can start measuring.
5 Make certain that the Slave1 (arm ID “slave”) entry is set under
Receiver.
6 Save the measurement plan.
The coupling matrix is deleted. You have to redefine coupling before you
can use the duplex mode.
If you are preparing a measurement plan, make absolutely sure that the
measuring columns cannot collide under any circumstances. The areas in
which the measuring columns move must never overlap.
If the areas of movement overlap, the possibility of a collision cannot be
excluded, because the two measuring columns move independently of
each other.
NOTICE
You have to save the measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise
the “client” will not be able to read the current alterations.
Testing a measurement You can test the measurement plan by opening the list of features and
plan selecting Edit ® Select Duplex Master Features (or Select Du-
plex Client Features). Thus you select from the list as well as in the
CAD window exactly those features that are to be measured by the mas-
ter and the client respectively.
When you start the measurement plan for the Current Selection, CA-
LYPSO measures all selected features - and, possibly, also other features
if they are included as a reference in one of the selected features.
RTP20 probe
Basics about the RTP20 probe
The RTP20 is an articulating probe without integrated motor. The stylus
can be rotated around the A and B axes of the probe in steps of 15°, thus
allowing 168 different angular positions.
( LL )
( OC )
As the RTP20 has no motor of its own, angle positioning can only be done
manually or semi-automatically:
– For manual positioning, release the locking lever, engage the probe
in the desired position and lock the lever again. Then enter the new
angular position in CALYPSO (see ➤Entering the current angular po-
sition in CALYPSO [⇨ 16‑14]).
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, this will affect
the measuring results and the probing system may be destroyed during
CNC operation.
(PR)
(PP)
(ST)
PP SC
PP PP
SC SC
In the illustration, the red arrow represents the approach direction. The
pivot pole can be placed to the left or right of the stylus changer rack.
If your configuration is different from the one shown here (for example, if
the pivot pole protrudes further into the measuring range than the stylus
changer rack), you will have to adapt the approach parameters accordingly
to ensure a collision-free automatic stylus system change. To do so, select
Approach Parameters and adapt the positions Before Change,
After Change and Over stylus system holder. Further information
on this subject can be found in the chapter ➤Stylus system chang-
er [⇨ 13‑1] of the Basics Instructions.
The probe moves to the pivot pole (PP) mounted on the measuring
table.
(PP)
The probe moves along the pivot pole up to the top. The locking lever
(LL) is thus pushed downwards and turned down.
The probe is now unlocked.
(LL)
The orientation cup (OC) of the probe is positioned exactly above the
sphere at the end of the pivot pole.
(OC)
The CMM motion is used to rotate and tilt the probe until the required
angular position of the stylus is reached.
The pivot sphere remains within the orientation cup during the entire
process.
To relock the probe after indexing, proceed in the same way as for
unlocking the probe.
The positioning process has now been completed.
CALYPSO automatically prompts you to qualify the pivot sphere with the
first semi-automatic angle positioning. You will be guided through the
procedure:
– Qualifying the reference sphere with the RTP20
– Qualifying the pivot sphere semi-automatically with the RTP20
If required, you may repeat these qualifications.
NOTICE
It is also possible to manually qualify the pivot sphere. This procedure
requires skill and experience as the cup of the RTP20 has to be positioned
with millimeter accuracy above the pivot sphere without contacting it.
Otherwise, damage may be caused. We recommend semi-automatic
qualification.
NOTICE
If the stylus is unknown or has not been qualified, it is possible to manually
qualify the pivot sphere. We do not recommend this procedure.
5 Carefully and precisely align the orientation cup to the pivot sphere.
Avoid touching the pivot sphere and do not apply any pressure to the pivot
pole. If the pivot pole is deformed, safe functioning of the semi-automatic
positioning is no longer guaranteed. The pivot pole needs to be replaced.
Risk of collision!
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, wrong measuring
points may be probed. Moreover, there is a risk of collision between the
probe and the workpiece, stylus changer rack or pivot pole.
What is new? The most important distinctive feature of the VAST XTR gold is the in-
stalled rotary joint. This joint is used to rotate the stylus receptacle in steps
of 15 degrees about a vertical axis and to thus position it at the correct
angle to the component. In some cases, the rotary table is therefore not
required.
Technical solution The new feature of the VAST XTR gold is the extended rotation function
of the plate: The rotational axis is driven by internal power generators.
The rotation function is only guaranteed in combination with the ZSH-70-
R-24 plate.
First, the solenoid of the VAST XTR gold stylus changer releases the plate
for rotation. The plate is fitted with a lock to guarantee fixed connection
to the rotational axis of the VAST XTR gold which is firmly connected to
the stylus changer. The rotational axis has a travel range of 2 mm in the
Z axis and holds the plate during the rotation. After reaching the nominal
position of the plate, the plate is loaded again into the stylus changer of
the VAST XTR gold.
During both manual and automatic plate change, the two unlock buttons
must be pressed at the same time to enable locking and unlocking of the
rotational axis.
IMPORTANT
Changing the plate without pressing the unlock buttons leads to damage
of the probe and plate.
Special advantages The VAST XTR gold demonstrates its strengths for a number of workpie-
ces:
– It measures components with many characteristics and angle posi-
tions such as gear boxes of helicopters and locomotives. The rotata-
bility of the plate makes it possible to minimize stylus configurations
and thus stylus changing times.
– It is suitable for rotationally symmetrical workpieces such as vent gears
or turbines. In special cases, a rotary table is not required for these
parts.
– The rotary joint allows the sensor to also access internal gears which
so far could only be measured with complex stylus configurations.
The new sensor is also especially suitable for large and heavy parts, for
example in shipbuilding and in the construction of wind power engines
and heavy machinery: For workpieces with a weight of more than five
tons, it is difficult to find a suitable rotary table for the required accuracy
and workpiece weights.
1)
When using the conventional VAST plates, the rotation function is
locked in the control.
To do so, loosen the four screws on the lower side so that the cube can
be rotated. Then tighten the screws again.
Qualifying the stylus All styli must be calibrated in any angle position.
NOTICE
Now the plate can be loaded into a rack position. To do so, the plate is
automatically rotated to this position prior to loading.
NOTICE
A plate is loaded correctly if the plate cover returns to the front initial
position after loading.
G Hierarchy
Of the CAD entities 2‑25
Gage correction qualification 4‑95
Holder
Gap
Approach paths 13‑25
Characteristic 5‑88
Color coding 13‑15
Gauss (LSQ feature) 5‑41
Setting a manual path 13‑27
GDT symmetry 5‑94
Holos 4‑82
Gear 4‑82
Homing the CMM 3‑13
GEAR PRO 4‑82
Horizontal rotary table axis 12‑9
General curve 4‑76
Horizontal-arm CMMs
General surface 4‑76
Combining measurement plans 6‑27
Geometry best fit 5‑130
Hyperlinks
Gesture recognition
In protocol templates 9‑25
On touch-screen 1‑26
getActualSide 6‑82
getCNCMode 6‑82 I
getNextStylusSystemName 6‑82 Icon
getPositionCMM 6‑82 Arranging on the AutoRun interface
14‑29
getProbe 6‑82
Copying and pasting 14‑46
getRackAssignment 6‑83
Exporting 14‑46
getRecordHead 6‑83
Importing 14‑27
Graphic
Removing 14‑46
Changing properties 8‑62
Icons
Creating a new single template 8‑62
Snapping to grid 14‑28
Magnified representation of the devia-
tions 8‑65 ID chip
Opening a single template 8‑60 For styli 13‑46
Graphics Images
Outputting texts, lines and legends In protocol templates 9‑11
8‑63 Import
Outputting variables 8‑64 CAD data 4‑15
Graphics editor Icon 14‑27
Graphics 8‑60 Measurement plan for RT axis 12‑13
Graphics element Importing CAD file 4‑15
Defining 8‑42 Inclination angle 5‑80
Utilities 5‑137 Index card
Grid Features 4‑4
Protocol templates 9‑20 Index exchange 5‑26
Grid lines Individual printout
In the CAD model 2‑19 Displaying 8‑13
Groups Printing 8‑13
Creating 6‑33 Individual printouts 8‑2
Renaming 6‑35
Ungrouping 6‑33